Home
        STAAD.foundation
         Contents
1.                                             1  0 2569510040 0 003219750  o  1 f  0 284902006 0   0 000755416 0  1 lo 3902504444 0   10 lo Jo  1 lo To fp   fo lo 0  1  0 134885996   2 467761278  0 204851001  0   0 001639820 0  2   1 218780040 2879164934    5 640240192 0  0 856886982  0  1 lo  0421932399  0 0 lo 0  1 lo 10 421932399  0 0 lo 0  2  1 244420051   1 088517308   2 414170026 0  4 461840152 0  1  1 068950057   1 036438465  0 183538004  0   0 002299840 0  1 lo  0 421932399  0 lo lo 0  1 lo  0 421932399  0 0 lo 0             RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 134   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 6 5 6 Contact Area    Click on Contact Area tab to review slab and soil contact  information  The table displays area in contact and area out of  contact with the soil for each load case  This option is available  only for Mat slab supported by soil           1489649012222 83 84121906447   28710 11696625  148110 0090714 183 36006411112   29565 00911713               RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 135    4 6 5 7    Plate Stresses    Pate Stress    Click on Plate Stress tab to open plate stress table  It displays 8  basic stress types for current load case  The stress types are    e SQX     SQY  e SX      SY   e SXY     MX      MY   e MXY    These stresses are based on plate local coordinate system  During  slab design program will automaticall
2.                    31 76  32   T7x12x12      2350   100x 2   12  Spacing   m      68 967 mm  32 1    Spacing along length for 12 mm bar   68 967 mm    Along width     2833 69 x 4  No  of 12 mm bar   m      25 06  26     mwx12x12    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Spacing      2350   100x2   12  26 1    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    6 20   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems      85 52 mm    Spacing along width for 12 mm bar   85 52 mm                         850 mm                                Pile       Pee                Bottom Reinforcement                                        Comparison  Value Of Reference STAAD foundation Difference in  Result Result Percent  Dua 669 mm 669 mm None  Depth  Governing  Moment 812 5 KN m 812 503 KN m Negligible   length   One Way  Shear 7 7  0 337 N mm 0 337 N mm None  Stress   Length   Two Way  Shear 0 852 N mm  0 852 N mm  None  Stress  Table 6 4    tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 21    6 5 Indian Verification Problem 5    Reference       Reinforced Concrete Design    by Pillai  amp  Menon  Page 652   Example 14 7     Problem    Design a combined footing for two columns with the given data  Cl   400 mm x 400 mm  with 4 25    bars and C2  500 mm x 500mm   with 4 28   bars supporting axial loads P1   900 KN and P2    1600 KN respectively  under service dead and live loads   The  column C1 is an exterior column whose exterior face is flush with  the property line  The c
3.             Results Scales    This group allows you to change the displacement scale of a mat  foundation  Displacement diagram is only available for mat    foundation after a successful analysis     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 241       Note  You should decrease the scaling value to increase the  amount of deflection or loading shown on the diagram  Why do  you decrease the parameter value to increase the apparent size   The values in the dialog box represent the actual displacement  or loading per unit distance on the graphic diagram  Therefore   if you reduce the amount of actual structural deflection  required to display a unit distance of deflection on the diagram   you will see a larger apparent displacement on the diagram              Loading Scales    This group allows you to change the display of load arrows   Concentrated force and moment for a point load has different  scaling options  Distributed load scale is applicable to line load on  mat and beam loads  Pressure load scale is applicable to  quadrilateral and circular pressure load     Modeling Scales  This group allows you to change the display size of supports and  piles  Drawings of footing size are not scaled as the sizes are not  known  so sometimes those entities may seem too big or small   Changing the scale user can control the sizes of those drawings   Set As Default  This option allows user to save the current scale setup for later use     so user don
4.         The combo box labeled Support for Pile Arrangement lists the  support numbers in the pile cap job  We will select the support  number and input the vertical  lateral and uplift pile capacities for  each support  The pile diameter  spacing and distance of the edge  from the corner piles are also input     Let us input data for Support No  1  Leave the Support for Pile  Arrangement drop down menu set to 1     tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 74   Section 3     Quick Tour    Under the Pile Capacity category  set the Unit drop down menu to  kip  Enter a value of 60 kips in the Vertical edit box  and a value  of 40 kips in the Lateral and Uplift edit boxes     Enter a value of 10 in  for the Pile Dia  Enter a value of 36 in  for  the Spacing  Enter a value of 24 in  for the Edge Distance    The total loading on the support is shown if we click on the Show  Loading On Support button     E Load Table for Support No  1    kowdcan  p Lp   utp   min   ipin           4 058242321  68 03285980  0 696796894  33 31498336 209 5984191      DI  2 699549674  47 24615097 5 542748928   450 1890258   130 1803131         We may either chose the Auto Arrangement or we may go for a  manual input of the co ordinates of the piles  If we choose Auto  Arrangement and click on the Calculate button  all possible pile  arrangements corresponding to the pile loads in all the load cases  are shown according to the BOCA standard  Please note the  program automatically ca
5.       Allowable bearing capacity of soil     Unit Weight of Soil       Unit weight of soil under consideration     Unit weight of Concrete          Unit weight of concrete with proper unit     Footing Clear Cover       Clear cover to be used for the footing     Minimum Bar Dia       Minimum diameter of bar to use for design     Maximum Bar Dia          Maximum diameter of bar to use for design     Stability Ratio    Starting Stability Ratio to be used for design     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 184   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 8 2 2 Footing Geometry    These are the geometrical parameter used for design     Footing Geometry z       Unit    Minimum Footing Diameter       The minimum footing diameter that will be used for starting design     Maximum Footing Diameter       The maximum range of footing diameter that will be used for  optimizing the design     Minimum Footing Thickness       The minimum footing thickness that will be used for starting  design        Maximum Footing Thickness    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 185    The maximum range of footing thickness that will be used for  optimizing the design     Pedestal Diameter       Diameter of the pedestal     Pedestal Thickness       Thickness of the pedestal     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  4 186   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Enviro
6.       Cover and Soil x                   But the footing geometry page for combined footing is unique   Click on the    Footing Geometry    leaf under    Design Parameters     group in main navigator pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 89    This will bring up geometry page where user has option to limit  footing size along length and width  User has option to check or  calculate footing dimensions  For this example we will use default  values as shown below           tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 3     Quick Tour    Now click on    Design    leaf under    Design Parameters    group in  main navigator pane to design the combined footing     5  Combined Footing Job      Design Parameters   5 Concrete  amp  Rebar   E Cover  amp  Soil    Footing Geometry    Design progress will be shown in Output pane           Processing Load Case 1    AE AE ma AE DE Da DE PD De Da DE Da Ob Da DE Da De Da De Da Da Da De Da Da Pe Pe    Processing Load Case 2    Men ne DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE PS DS PL DE PS PE P3 P3    Processing Load Case 1 for Coner Pressure    Processing Load Case 2 for Coner Pressure    AA AA PE E Dab DE DE DE DE DE E DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE Pt DE DE DE E E    After design is complete a summary table will appear in output    pane        Detail drawing and layout drawing will be shown in corresponding  tabs  Other than that  a BM  amp  SF diagram will 
7.       PS Pg he       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 64   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    The following cover parameters and soil characteristics are  available     e Bottom Clear Cover   e Unit Weight of Soil   e Soil Bearing Capacity   e Depth of Soil above footing  e Surcharge for Loading    Set as Default    The Set as Default check box allows you to use the values inputted  in the Cover and Soil form as the default values for future projects     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 65  4 6 1 3 Footing Geometry    5 4 Isolated Footing Job      4 Design Parameters   5 Concrete  amp  Rebar   Sg Cover  amp  Soil    far 4 Footing Geometry    E Sliding  amp  Overturning   Gy Design    Clicking on the Footing Geometry leaf opens a form in data area  pane that allows you to input isolated footing geometry   The following footing details are available     e Thickness   e Length   e Width   e Offset in both X and Z direction  e Length Width Ratio   e Footing Type    The Footing Geometry provides you with the option to instruct  STAAD foundation to calculate the footing dimensions  or you can  check the footing dimension by specifying fixed values  You can  specify a desired minimum and maximum for Thickness  Length   and or Width  as well as an increment for Thickness  Plan  Dimension  and Length Width Ratio by entering the desired values  in the corresponding 
8.      If you want to review or change any of your installation settings  dick Back  Click Cancel to  exit the wizard            lt  Back   Install   Cancel    Clicking on    Install    button in next string will start installing the program     After the installation is complete  please restart your machine for  any changes made to take effect     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    1 10   Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up    1 4 Running STAAD  foundation    Click on the STAAD  foundation icon from the STAAD foundation  program group as shown below     TG Set Program Access and Defaults        F staaD foundation   gt  BP License Administrator  PP Tutorials    gt  CP STAAD  Foundation Online Documentation       STAAD  foundation    Create Now Project  General Foundation    Piant Foundation  Open Existing Project          If you re a first time user unfamiliar with STAAD foundation  we  suggest that you go through the Quick Tour presented in Section 3  of this manual     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up   1 11    0 o Oo gt     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    2 1  Theoretical Basis    Section 2    This section includes discussion on the following topics        e Introduction to Finite Element Analysis  e Element Load Specification   e Theoretical Basis   e Element Local Coordinate System   e Output of Element Forces   e Si
9.      Mxd and Myd are then used in lieu of Mx and My for  calculations of the required reinforcing  Use of the  modified bending moments brings about more accurate  distribution of the reinforcing  better matching critical  areas of the slab     Flexural design notes     Reinforcement calculations for slab panels are based on Chapter 10  of ACI 318 02  The minimum reinforcing ratio complies with the  limits prescribed for shrinkage and temperature reinforcement in  Section 7 12  Maximum spacing of rebar is 18 in  The maximum  reinforcing ratio corresponds to the net tensile strain at nominal  strength equal to 0 004  Clause 10 3 5   Strength reduction factor is  established in accordance with Section 9 3 2     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    2 26   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    Punching shear design notes     Design for two way shear is carried out in accordance with Section  11 12  The unbalanced moment transfer by eccentricity of shear is  based on Clause 11 12 6  Shear strength of concrete is based on  Clause 11 12 2 1  Strength reduction factor used is 0 75  in  accordance with Section 9 3 2     The program computes shear stress values at four corners of the  rectangular critical section located at the distance of d 2 from edges  of a column  The calculations include the unbalanced moment    transfer effect  if applicable  in accordance with 11 12 6 2     4     Strip Footing design  The program uses the following criteria  
10.      Ready    Main Navigator Pane Main View Pane Output View Pane Data Input Pne StatUs Bar    Title Bar    Located at the top of the screen  the Title Bar displays the file name  of the project that is currently open  amp  active     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 4   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Menu Bar    Located just below the Title Bar  the Menu Bar gives you access to  all the facilities of STAAD foundation  Many of the same  functions are also available in the Toolbar and Page Control pane     Users who are familiar with STAAD  foundation and its commands  usually find that the Menu Bar is the most efficient way to quickly  access the commands they need     A complete description of the Menu Bar commands is provided in  Section 4 4 of this manual     Toolbar    Located below the Menu Bar by default  the dockable Toolbar  gives you access to the most frequently used commands  Each  button in the toolbar offers Tool Tip help  As you move the mouse  cursor over a button  the name of the button     called a Tool Tip      appears above or below the button  To control the appearance of  the toolbar or create your own customized toolbar  use the View    Toolbar menu command  To control the appearance of Tool Tips   use the View   Tool Tip Options menu command     A complete description of the Toolbar is provided in Section 4 5 of  this manual     Main Navigator Pane    Located at the left side of the
11.      Select current panel    Boundary       Longitudinal axis setup       By drawing a line on slab            By specifying coordinates Unit   in       Starting  0 Starting Z  0             Ending  100 Endingz 0    Specify discrete design points       Division along longitudinal axis  60             Division along transverse axis  60          Select load type    Use ultimate load cases only x        8 Generate moment envelope       The following commands and inputs are available to generate  moment envelope     Select Current Panel    If you have multiple boundaries you need to choose current panel to  be designed  By default program selects the first created boundary     Longitudinal Axis Setup  There are two methods to define the longitudinal axis  You can    setup the axis either by defining two X Z coordinates or by clicking  on two points on the screen     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 147    By drawing a line on slab    Select this option to click on two points on the screen to define  longitudinal axis  Once the first point is clicked program will draw  a line from the first point to the mouse point to show the axis  After  second point is clicked on the screen  program will calculate the  X Z coordinates of those points and fill up the form start and end  coordinates     By specifying coordinates  Select this option to input X Z coordinates of the start and end  points of the axis  By default program shows a global X a
12.      User   s Manual    6 18   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Assuming 850 mm overall depth and 12 mm bar   Effective depth de   850  100 75 6    669 mm    700                0 479  1100   0 87 fy    Kumax      Rumax   0 36 x fc x Kumax X  1  0 42 Kumax    2 066   Mujim  Rumax Xx B x de    2172 953 KN m  gt  M   Hence safe   Area of Steel Required   Area of steel required along length     fe 4 6MU    Ast   0 5 x    x  1  1         xBx 5 3592 61 mm  fy    fexBX dex de       Minimum area of steel Astmin   0 0012 x B x D   2397 mm     Area of steel required along width        fe 4 6MU 5    0 5 x    x  1   _ 1                      _   xB x d    2833 69 mm  fy fexBX dex de    Minimum area of steel Astmin   0 0012 x B x D   2397 mm   Check for One Way Shear  Along Length     100Ast  Percentage of steel p      0 2285    Bxde       Corresponding allowable 7    0 338 N mm     Vu max    Bxde       Developed shear stress T        tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 19    3x 416 667 x 106  Vumax       KN   530 KN  250  530 x 1000  Developed shear stress T                _  2350 x 669      0 337 N mm   lt  D cant  Hence safe   Check for Two Way Shear  Vumax    3000 333 33  KN   2666 67 KN    2666 67 x 1000  4x1169 x 669    Developed shear stress T       0 852 N mm     K    min  0 541  1   1    Allowable shear stress   K  xT   1x0 25 fc    0 968 N mm   gt  developed T    hence safe     Spacing    Along length     3592 61 4  No  of 12 mm bar  
13.     M xy    TORSION       tamilnavarasam com       Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 17       local top dx    Z surface  N     A   local y    local x                            local top    Z surface           local x          In plane shear stresses Sxy and Syx          RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual       2 18   Section 2     Theoretical Basis       local top    Z surface   local y  dy  local x  SQX       SQY          Out of plane shear stresses  SQX and SQY     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 19    2 7    STAAD  foundation Program Theory    STAAD  foundation performs structural design of foundations in  accordance with the ACI 318 05 Code  The available foundation  types are  isolated spread footing  pile cap  strip footing  mat  foundation and octagonal footing     1  Isolated Spread Footing  The program uses the following criteria     a  Soil bearing capacity   Shear and flexural strength of footing  no shear  reinforcing assumed     c  Compressive and flexural strength of pedestal    Step 1   Determine footing plan geometry based on loading  and bearing resistance of the soil     Stress distribution under the footing is assumed to be  linear  For eccentrically loaded footings  the stresses may  become tensile under part of the foundation  In such cases  the program sets stress values in uplift zones to zero and  calculates new values elsewhere for the revised equilibrium  condit
14.     Output View Options    will appear in data input  pane  Please select    Show Soil Pressure    radio to view soil pressure    contour     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 51    Output View Options  Displacement Diagram Setup  Show Nodal Displacement  Use Average Normal    Show Beam Displacement  Drawing Options      Draw Line Diagram    Draw 3D diagram    Stress Contour    Show Beam Stres     Show Plate Stress 3         Show Soil Pressure    Plate Stress Settings  Select Stress Type   None    Beam Stress Settings       Select Stress Type          Show Legend  C Plot Contour on Deflected Shape       A soil pressure legend will be displayed at the left of the view pane  along with the soil pressure contour  Please note  the maximum soil  pressure for load case 1 is 4 556 kip ft2  Also  minimum soil  pressure is 0 0 which means that some part of the mat has lost  contact with the soil and the program has distributed the pressure of  that portion to the rest of the mat slab     tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 52   Section 3     Quick Tour    Base Pressurd       Y  kip ft2    o    0 285  0 571   0 856  1 142  1 427    4        wW w N N N 54    on N o  Seana gp  HBO    3 710  3 995  4 281  4 566    We can easily verify the slab   s loss of contact with the soil by  reviewing    Contact Area    table  Please note for both load cases  more than 80  of total area is in contact with the soil        Load   Areain     of 
15.    4 49    5 C Load Description Tree  EX Load Case 1  Load Case 1      Column Reaction Loading       Reaction  Fx 5 00 Fy  5 00  EX Load Case 2  Live Load     Column Reaction Loading  i       Reaction  Fz 10 00  NE Load Comb 101 Load Case 1   Live Load       Load Case 1X 1 00        Live Load X 1 00    Load Case No im             Load Combination Title   Load Case 1   Live    Combination Type Allowable Strer wa    Available Primary Load Cases          Factor    E       3  gt        Load Combination Definition    Load Case Factor  Load Case 1 1 90    Live Load  1 00                     Edt Load Combination    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 50   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 4 3 12 Remove Load Case        Loads  amp  Factors   5 Create New Load Case   e Add a Column Reaction Load    amp  Add a Point Load  for Mat only    S5 Add a Line Load  for Mat only    Sy Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only    67 Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only   5  Add Member Load   8 Add Uniform Load   y Add Concentrated Load    Add Trapezoidal Load   Sy Safety Factor Table  E Create New Load Combination     5  Remove Load Case    To remove an entire Load Case or a specific load item select that  load item or load case in load description window and click on     Remove Load Case    leaf under Loads and Factors group  A  message box will appear to confirm delete operation  click on     Yes    to delete the selected load i
16.    5 3 Heat Exchanger Foundation    Two types of Heat Exchanger are allowed to design  They are    Stacked Exchanger and Single Exchanger        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 26   Section 4      STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  5 3 1 Exchanger Geometry Page    This is the first page of the wizard where you have to input all the  relevant geometrical data for the Heat Exchanger  Following   picture shows the corresponding page  Clicking on any input fields  creates a description of the corresponding field below the diagram     Unit  in v  Heat Exchanger  L  370     Upper Exchanger Diameter  UD   55    Lower Exchanger Diameter  LD   55       Height From Pier top to Upper Exchanger  H   110     O Stacked Exchanger     Single Exchanger Soil Depth  SD   60  L   Length of Exchanger Height of Pier top from Base  B   125    Spacing of Exchangers  5   75    As you can see that a picture placed left to the page shows the  diagrammatic view of the corresponding dimensions     Unit  Unit of length for all the input in this page only     Stacked Exchanger       Click the Stacked Exchanger radio button to use one  The picture  above shows it     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 27  k            Stacked Exchanger    O Single Exchanger    Single Exchanger       Click the Stacked Exchanger radio button to use one  The picture  above shows it     k    h o        Pi a           Stacked 
17.    6 16   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    RangaRakes    6 4 Indian Verification Problem 4    Reference     Reinforced Concrete Design    by S N Sinha  Problem 11 13   Problem    Design a pile cap with the given data  Load Fy   2000KN  MZ    300 KN m  Spacing   900 mm  Pile in Pile Cap   75 mm  Bottom  Cover   100 mm  Edge Distance   275 mm  No  of Pile   9  fc   15  MPa  fy   415 MPa  Column Dimension   500mm x 500mm   Ultimate Load Factor   1 5     2000 KN            7  i  pe a ae     e  HER Agt 3  AOR Hok dok  9 op       He    be    900    o      900       4  150   4250 je t  400  gt       250     150    2350          j  y       tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 17       Solution  Pile reaction    15x2000 1 5x300x0 9   1   5   416 667 KN  9 6x  0 90 9   15x2000 1 5x300x0 9   P2       416 667 KN  9 6x  0 9 x 0 9     1 222000  1 5x300x0 9             P3     416 667 KN  9 6x 0 9x0 9   1 5 x 2000  P4            333 333 KN  1 5 x 2000  P5           333 333 KN  1 5x 2000  P6                  333 333 KN  1 5x2000 1 5x300x0 9  P7    250 KN  9 6x 0 9x0 9   1 5x2000 1 5x300x0 9  P8                                      250 KN  9 6x  0 9x0 9   1 5x2000 1 5x300x0 9  P9     250 KN  9 6x  0 90 9     Bending moment at critical section  at column face    M   along length    3 x 416 667 x 0 65   812 5 KN m  M   along width     416 667 333 3334 250  x 0 65 KN m      650 KN m    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation
18.    Length unit will be used to define mat boundary and to assign slab  thickness     Default Unit Type  Default unit type to be used to setup design parameters     Design Code    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 231    Concrete design code  Program currently supports ACI  BS 8110  and IS 456 codes     Support assignment    Select the supports to be assigned to the new mat job  You have the  option to include all supports or selected supports only     Boundary Setup  As it   s a rectangular mat foundation we just need to define top left  corner and then specify Length and Width values of the boundary   The slab will always be in XZ plane  Specify Y level of the slab  too   Meshing  Select mesh generation technique to be used  Program can generate  either quadrilateral shaped plate element or triangular shaped plate  element  As it is a rectangular mat quadrilateral shape will be more  commonly used  However  if the mat is supported on pile or the mat  has line loads  then triangular meshing is recommended   Slab Property  Define both analysis and design thickness of the slab  Define soil  subgrade modulus  Please note  the wizard will create the soil  property of the slab but will not assign automatically     Create    Click on create button to generate a rectangular mat foundation job     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 232   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 10 1 8 Loading Toolbar    RangaRakes    STAAD  
19.    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    Section 3     Quick Tour    Calculation sheet will be opened automatically as shown below     Octagonal Foundation 5  Geometrical Deseripton    Pedestal Geometry  Unit  Height    Diameter  Footing Geometry  Unit      Minimum Footing Diameter      Maximum Footing Diameter  Minimum Footing Depth  Maximum Footing Depth    tin  136 000  136 000    n     72 000    300 000   36 000    72 000    Minimum Stability Ratio  Soil Depth   Cover   F   Fy   Bar Type   Minimum Bar Diameter  Maximum Bar Diameter  Concrete Density   Soil Density   Allowable Bearing Pressure     1 500    0 000 ft   2 000 in  14 000 ksi     60 000 ksi     Metric    0   18     125 000 lb ft3    115 000 Ib ft3   4 000 kip ft2    We may now want to visit layout drawing and detailed drawing  pages to see those drawings     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 97       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 98   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 25    Conclusion    We hope you have enjoyed this Quick Tour of STAAD foundation  s  features and facilities  If you would like additional assistance in  learning how to use STAAD  foundation  there are many resources  available to you  Within the Online Help facility  you will find  documentation describing the program theory and a detailed  description of every command in the program  You may also view  a number of animated movie files that demonstrate how t
20.    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com         Plant Foundations       Section 5    This section includes discussion on the following topics   e Introduction    e Vertical Vessel Foundation  e Heat Exchanger Foundation    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    5 2  Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    5 1    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Introduction    This section provides an overview of two new modules added in  STAAD  foundation 4 0  These modules are added keeping in mind  the necessities of the fast growing plant industry  Theses two  modules are Vertical Vessel Foundation and Heat Exchanger  Foundation     These are completely wizard driven modules  Wizard will guide the  user to easily create the foundation step by step  You will finish up  a job just simply clicking on    Next    button from the wizard and  putting some input values  However you can directly jump to any  page using a tree control on the left side of the wizard pane   Following picture shows the tree control     Plant Foundation    essel Footing   Geometry  Primary load cases  Time Period  Wind Load Generation  Seismic Load generation  Load Combination  Design Parameters  Foundation Type    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 3    5 1 1 Creating a New Plant Setup Job    Go to the Start Page of STAAD foundation 4 0  Choose    Plant  Foundation        STAAD  foundation    Create New Project  General Foundation  Help             
21.    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 190   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    New  The New menu command opens and creates a new project   Open    The Open menu command brings up the open file dialog box and  allows you to open an existing STAAD  foundation project        STAAD foundation File opening  Look in       Examples      o egn              CD Verification  x06  fs   Ia ex08_slabDesign0 afs  aj ex08iso afs    Ea  ex08pile_iso afs                File name   ex08 afs          Hesottpe   STAD fandan Restt  W       To open an existing project  navigate to the directory in which the  project file is located and then select the file and click on Open     Save    The Save menu command brings up the save file dialog box the first  time the icon is clicked and allows you to save the active project to  a file  To save a project  navigate to the directory in which you  want to save the project  type in a file name for the project and then  click on Save     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 191       STAAD  foundation File saving    Save in       Examples      Oo 2 eao             Verification    E  ex08 afs   Ia ex08_slabDesign0 afs  Ia ex08iso afs    IC exOgpie iso afs                 File name     ex08pile_iso afs      Save as type    STAAD foundation Files     afs                STAAD foundation projects are saved with an  afs file extension   After a project h
22.    User s Manual  4 150   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Mat Slab Design       Grid Points   Moment   Punching Shear                                                                                 Reinforcement Side     Longitudinal    Transverse OTop    Bottom   amp     1  1    12 542 0 000  2 912 0 259  i    3 814 0 000  3 436 0 259 1   4 915 0 000  0 509 0 259  1   13 644 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   22373 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   31 402 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   39 831 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   48 559 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   57 288 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   66 017 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   74 746 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   83 475 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   92 203 0 000 0 000  0 259 2   100 932 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   109 661 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   118 390 0 000 0 000 0 259 2   127 119 0 000 0 000 0 259 2 hd                 RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 151    4 6 6 3 Reinforcing zones    As design is performed on thousands of points it will be impossible  to go through all those numbers and create a reinforcement layout   STAAD foundation has a tool to create reinforcement zones much  like reinforcement contour plot  Number of zones is user specified   By default program use three zones        Reinforcement Zoning      Slab Detailing       Choose Slab Face     Longitudinal Top v          Preferred Zone Reinforcment Count   3      Create Block    Steel Detailing             View Option  Show     Control Nodes v    Zone Editing  L
23.    d  Soil bearing capacity    e  Shear and flexural strength of footing  no shear  reinforcing assumed     f  Compressive and flexural strength of pedestal    Step 1   Determine footing plan geometry based on loading  and bearing resistance of the soil     Stress distribution under the footing is assumed to be  linear  For eccentrically loaded footings  the stresses may  become tensile under part of the foundation  In such cases  the program sets stress values in uplift zones to zero and  calculates new values elsewhere for the revised equilibrium  condition  The final plan dimensions of the footing are  established iteratively from the condition that the maximum  stress should not exceed the factored bearing resistance of  the soil     Step 2   Calculate footing thickness based on structural  capacity in shear and bending     tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 27    Structural design of the footing consists of the following     d  Punching shear check  in accordance with Section  11 12 2  at a distance of d 2 from the pedestal  The  critical section comprises four straight line segments   parallel to the corresponding sides of the pedestal    e  One way shear  beam action   in accordance with  Sections 11 1 through 11 5  at a distance of d from the  face of the pedestal  in both orthogonal directions  The  critical plane is assumed to extend over the entire  width length of the footing    f  Bending  in accordance with Sections 15 4 2 and  10 3 4  wit
24.    irection   0 113  Seismic Response Coefficient Parameters Transverse Direction 5  Response Modification Factor  R    3 lv Longitudinal Direction   0 512 s  Occupancy Importance Factor  I    1 25 iv Long Transition Period  TL    0 s    Select using Zip Code       Choose    Select using Zip Code     This will populate the    Select  Zip    combo box and then choosing any one of them will fill up the  other input boxes  Only you need to choose the Site Class from the  Site Class combo box  It will also show the corresponding City   Latitude and Longitude for that Zip Code    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  5 40   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Sesimic Ground Motion Values      Select using Zip Code O Enter Value Manually    Select Zip   no501            City   r  Site Class   A v  Latitude    Longitude     al ortance Factor  I    1 00 lv     lt  Previous   Cancel       Enter Value Manually       Choose    Enter Value Manually    to enter the value of SZ and Ss  with your own choice     Site Class    Value of Fa  amp  Fv depends on choice of Site Class  But you can use  your own value for them on choosing Site Class as    F        Response Modification Factor  R        The default value for this field is 2 or 3  But the input control for    this value is not a read only combo box  so you can enter your own  desired value     Occupancy Importance Factor  1        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD
25.    t need to change the scale each time a project is  opened     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 242   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 10 1 11 Unit Setup Toolbar    The Set Output Unit command opens a dialog box that allows you  to set output units     Unit setup A  STAAD  foundation Unit Setup  Length Unit  in  Force Unit  Ikp m  Moment Unit   kipin w   Reinfocing bar Unit  in  Reinfocement spacing Unit  in            The following output units can be set     e Length Unit   e Force Unit   e Moment Unit   e Reinforcing Bar Diameter  e Reinforcing Bar Spacing    Length Unit    Length unit is used in all tables and pages as appropriate  Column  position  column dimension  pile position  slab thickness are some    RangaRakes    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 243    of the pages where length units are used  Forms for loading etc    output tables and calculation sheet also uses length unit     Force Unit    Force unit is used for all input and output related force  Pressure  unit is determined combining length and force unit     Moment unit  Moment unit is primarily used for loading input and output   Reinforcing Bar Diameter    This unit is used in output table and calculation sheet to report    reinforcing bar diameter   Reinforcing Bar Spacing    This unit is used in output table and calculation sheet to report  reguired and provided reinforcing bar spacing     R
26.    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 7    4 8    4 9    4 6 4  4 6 5    4 6 6    4 6 3 3 Pile Layout  4 6 3 3 1 Pile Position Table  4 6 3 3 2 Recangular Pile Arrangement Wizard  Parametric   4 6 3 3 3 Circular Pile Arrangement Wizard  Parametric   4 6 3 4 Mesh generation  4 6 3 4 1 Adding Mesh Region  4 6 3 4 1 1 Using Polyline  4 6 3 4 1 2 Add a reectangular region  4 6 3 4 1 3 Add a circular region  4 6 3 4 1 4 Regular Polygon  4 6 3 4 2 Meshing Setup  Analysis properties  Mat slab design dption  4 6 5 1 Analyze  4 6 5 2 Displacement  4 6 5 3 Disp Displacement  summery  4 6 5 4  Support Reaction s   4 6 5 5  Support Reaction Summery  4 6 5 6 Contact Area  4 6 5 7 Plate Stresses  4 6 5 8 Plate Stresses Summery  4 6 5 9 Pile Reaction  4 6 5 10 Output View Options  Slab Design  4 6 6 1 Moment Envelope Generation  4 6 6 2 Design Parameters  4 6 6 3 Reinforcing zones  4 6 6 4 Section Design Along a Line  4 6 6 5 Calculation Sheet    Combined Footing    4 7 1  4 7 2  4 7 3    Creating Combined footing Job  Creating the Combined Footing  Defining the Design Parameters  4 7 3 1 Concrete and Rebar  4 7 3 2 Cover and Soil   4 7 3 3 Footing Geometry  4 7 3 4 Design    Octagonal Footing    4 8 1  4 8 2    Creating Octagonal footing Job  Defining the Design Parameters  4 8 2 1 Design Parameters  4 8 2 2 Footing Geometry  4 8 2 3 Design    The Menu Commands    4 9 1  4 9 2  4 9 3  4 9 4    File Menu  Edit Menu  View Menu  Tools Menu    4 10 The Toolbars    4 98  4 99  4 100  4 102  
27.   English       Support Assignm      Assign to Listed supp         Listed Supports 23       L       Loading  Available Load Cases         cea  3 3  amp  2  Selected Load Cases      1   1 4DL   1 7LL   2   75 1 4DL   1 7LL   1 7L              tamilnavarasam com    4 58    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 6    Local Data    Local Data are specific to job types  Each footing type has its own  unique local data types  Design parameters such as concrete cover   rebar specifications  soil parameters and footing geometry are  typical examples of design parameters  We will discuss local data  for each footing type separately  We will start with Isolated footing    job     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 59  4 6 1 Isolated footing    5  Design Parameters   5 Concrete  amp  Rebar    amp  Cover  amp  Soil     5 Footing Geometry    Sliding  amp  Overturning   Gy Design       Isolated footing job type has a unique group for local data called  Design Parameters  The Design Parameters group allows you to  specify design parameters for an isolated footing and is only active  for isolated footing job types     The Design Parameters group contains the following elements     e Concrete and Rebar   e Cover and Soil   e Footing Geometry   e Sliding  amp  Overturning  e Design    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  4 60   Section 4     ST
28.   Import toolbar allows you to import any analyzed STAAD Pro file  and update foundation input database if the STAAD Pro file gets  changed     Import toolbar has following icons    e Import  e Update database    Import    The Jmport menu command is used to begin a new project by  importing the support geometry and support reactions from a  STAAD Pro analysis  The ability to import analysis data from  other structural analysis software programs will be provided in a  future release of STAAD foundation     You can only import a STAAD Pro model that has been  successfully analyzed  because you will want to have the support  reactions available for the foundation design  When the Import  command is executed  an import dialog box will appear     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 221          Look in    Bus      4 Ee ta    2 element_trap_jt_tri std  2  EXAMPOS STD BE     Ex01CAST STD  2  EXAMP06 STD Ina   S  EXAMPO1 STD    EXAMPO7 STD EI   3  ExamPo2 STD DENTEN B      ExaMPO3 STD      EXAMPO9 STD  ne   3  EXAMPO4 STD    EXAMP10 STD Im       Filename    EXAMPO8 STD    Files oftype   STAAD ProFies std  x    To import a STAAD Pro file  navigate to the directory in which the  file is located and then select the file and click on Open  Another  dialog box will appear listing all the available load cases in the  STAAD Pro file  You may select any or all of the load cases by  toggling on the corresponding check box  and then clic
29.   STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  5 10   Section 4   STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment             C  Fundamental Period  T    139 s Long Transition Period  TL   9 s  Length  ft v Force Length   kips ft iv Force   kip iv  Distributed Mass   Concentrated Mass            gt        1692 0367 75 2000 66 5000 15 4380 1200 0000 77 2200  1453 2966  66 5000 58 2000 14 5000 0 1308 1200 0000 69 0000       2233 7649 58 2000 41 5000 4 5000 0 1303 4 1200 0000 50 5000    19726208 41 5000 33 2000 4 5000 0 1303 7 7000 0000 50 5000  2238 0009 33 2000 8 2000 4 5000 0 1303 50 5000  1162 0565 8 2000 0 0000 4 5000 0 1303 28 5000          2500 0000 14 5000  1200 0000  8 0000                a    v      Calculate Time Period    Fundamental Period  T        If you want to input the value of the Fundamental Period manually  then check the check box  The edit box right next to it will be  active and you can enter the value  If you want a calculated value  provided by the software then leave it unchecked and the edit box  will be transformed into a read only state  Now after giving all the  necessary value if you click on    Calculate Time Period    button  then the calculated value will be shown in the edit box     Long Transition Period  TL        Long period transition period  s  determined in Section 11 4 5  Unit  Units for length  uniformly distributed load and force     Distributed Mass       In this table put the distributed mass properties of the vessel  Inputs  for diameter and thi
30.   STAAD foundation Screen Organization    STAAD foundation   s GUI uses a split window interface  The split  window interface divides the screen into three panes  the Page  Control pane  the Data Area pane  and the Main View or Graphics  Window pane  In addition to the three panes  the interface also  contains a Title Bar  Menu Bar  Toolbar  and Status Bar  The  seven elements of the STAAD foundation GUI are identified in the  figure below     Title Bar Menu Bar Tool Bar             6 200 TON SILOS MAT afs   Staadbouentat  i Be Gat Yon Todo  LD oe tel     32 x DE S  P  MATESI   1 DEAD LOAD CASE 1 2  tod By sed ET   LPDAPIPAPD AP A gt  GRAB YAN hh Re he O ib BO C08  Oa    ax PUT Sartpage Detal raving   Layow Drang   Calculation Sheet   stro Foong Graph       Datallnpyk Pane  ax                         E Edt Cum   17 Oeleto Jeb   1 Mat foundation Job   55 Defauk analysis proportos  E Physca beam table   5 Pile Layout    GB Pie postion table    Gr Rectangular ofe arang             tg Mesh generation     tg Add meshing regions     Usngpoine   Ry Add arectanguer regon  E Add a croar region  E Regular polygon  B Meshing setup           Slab thidness  E Sol property  E Ple sorig   18   Mat slab design opti          aow oco 2000001  dooc     ONggoro  dooc  aooo osod  0000001  2 000001 _o cocaet _  0 000001    E Renforcemert Zone   E Cr dab byalne  E Cacuation shest    2  gt  Bice Summary Rescton  _ Reacton Sunni    Certaci Area   Pini Sess  Piao Sires   Data Input Pane CL            
31.   gt  Reinforcement Zoning   5 Calculation sheet    Clicking on the Cut slab by a Line opens a form in the Data Area  pane that allows you to draw a stress diagram along a specified  section line and then design slab along that line     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 157    Cut slab by a line    Slab cut options         By drawing a line on slab     By specifying coordinates    Starting  0 Starting Z  Ending  100 EndingZ    Interpolation Factor   3 3     Graph Scale Factor   1      Unit  in                      Stress Type     None  y    B Mat_Examp08  Cut Line  MX                      Design Selected Line    The following commands and options are available in the Data  Area pane     e Slab cut options   e Interpolation Factor  e Graph Scale Factor   e Insert a new Cut Line  e Stress Type   e Design Selected Line    Slab cut options    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 158   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    The cut line or the line on the slab can be drawn either by inputting  two coordinates or by clicking at two points on the screen     By drawing a line on slab    Using this option will allow user to draw a line in the graphics by  clicking on two points  Click on first point and then stretch the line  to next point and click again  It will transfer coordinates of those  two points to the form under start and end points        Graph Scal
32.  000000 11022040  1 121771    0 813954                   tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 137    4 6 5 9    Pile Reaction       If the mat is supported by piles there will be an additional Pile  Reaction table will be added in Output pane     Pile Reaction table displays reaction forces on all piles present in  current job  Piles are treated as spring support where all rotational  degrees are released  So  the table displays three translational  reactions for each pile         0 01133845    54 36353       0 1661929                               0 001171363 40 76259   0 003984433   0 03511672 30 05718   0 03207626   0 03981937  19 89219  0 01796152  0 0005544513     19003304   0 00124602  0 0002315116  1 41415  0 0004449158   4 097655e 005 14985878   0 0006839456          tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 138   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 5 10 Output View Options        Mat slab design options   Gy Analyze   Hi Output View Options    E Moment envelope generation   S5 Design Parameters  E Reinforcement Zoning   57 Cut slab by a line   5 Calculation sheet    Click on Output View Options to display different sets of output  like displacement diagrams  soil pressure contour  plate stress  contour etc  This option will open a form in data area pane where  user will be able to select different options     Output View Options    Displacement Diagram S
33.  2    a Create from Selected Nodes    _ Delete Al    Also click once on the    Geometry    view which will show the real  life picture of the footing        Note   The supports have to be collinear to become a part of a combined  footing  If the supports are non collinear then it will show an error    message box as follows        StaadFoundation g       All the selected supports are not colinear and parallel to global axis  Cannot create combined Footing    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 167    Delete    To delete a footing  select the footing from the tree  click on     Delete     Deletion of support from a combined footing is not  allowed  You need to recreate the combined footing to edit it  This  will generate the following error message        StaadFoundation ix        Deleting of support from a strip footing is not permitted   You need to recreate the footing if you wish to edit it        Delete All    To delete all the combined footing at a click  simply click on     Delete All    button     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 168    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 7 3    Defining the Design Parameters    Note that after you have created a combined footing job  the left  side main navigator tree view is populated with the    Design  Parameter    for    Combined Footing Job          Combined Footing Job  5 Design Parameters    Concr
34.  5 15    5 2 5 Seismic Load Generation Page    Inputs for seismic load can be given in two ways  same as for wind  load  You can directly input the shear force  amp  moment values with  choosing the proper unit or you can use the software to calculate  those values using ASCE 7 2005     Check the    Directly Input Seismic Load    check box to use your  own calculated value for shear force and moment     Directly Input Seismic Load Sesimic Ground Motion Values    Shear Value   0    Unit   kp ix   Moment Yalue    0    Unit   kip in E w     Seismic Response Coefficient Parameters    Else uncheck the above said check box to use the software to  calculate the values for you  Again that can be done in two ways   You can select US Zip code to get the parametric values or else you  can provide their values from your own knowledge     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 16   Section 4      STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment     Directly Input Seismic Load Sesimic Ground Motion Values  O Select using Zip Code   Enter Value Manually  si  0 g  ss   0 9    Site Class   la v    Seismic Response Coefficient Parameters    Response Modification Factor  R   2 y Occupancy Importance Factor  I    1 00 y    Select using Zip Code       Choose    Select using Zip Code     This will populate the    Select  Zip    combo box and then choosing any one of them will fill up the  other input boxes  Only you need to choose the Site Class from the  Site Class com
35.  Cap Design Summary    After design is completed a new tab called Pile Cap Design  Summary will appear in output pane  Click that tab to view design  summary table  You can copy this table by selecting it and then by  pressing Ctrl C key which then can be pasted in Microsoft Excel or  Word                        8   18 00 in  8  8   18 00 in       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 89    Program will automatically open calculation sheet which presents  detailed step by step calculation with relevant code clause numbers   eguations and corresponding calculated values  Calculation sheet is  organized in a logical manner which shows program flow     Critical Axial design Load  Pu   0 00 kip  Load Case   2    From ACI C111 12 2 1  Bo for column   2X  Bea   Deot 2X dee    216 00 i    Equation 11 35  V4    2 4  xpoxaax  1000  F   3442 58    c    Equation 11 36  V4    2 4oxSe x pax 1000XF   5610 13 kip    Equation 11 37  V3   4XBoX denx  1000 XF2 2295 05 kip  Punching shear strength  V    minimum of  V4  Yoo  Veg    2295 05 kip       After successful design  you can open Report Setup to print design  summary table  Switch to Geometry view in main view area to  activate toolbar  Now click on Report Setup icon in toolbar     It will open a report setup dialog box where under current job a  summary table will be available  Select that item by clicking that  item in left list box and bring it over to right size by clicking  button  
36.  Fields                   Set as Default    The Set as Default field allows you to use the values inputted in the  Footing Geometry form as the default values for future projects     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 69  4 6 1 4 Design    5  Isolated Footing Job  5 4 Design Parameters    gt  Concrete  amp  Rebar    Cover  amp  Soil   ey Footing Geometry    amp  Sliding  amp  Overturning    Click on Design leaf to design all the footings associated in the  current job  Program will list all design progress messages  including warning and error messages in the bottom output pane  It  will help user to understand and review design progress           Processing Node number 1    Set initial footing dimension as 3 417 X3 417 X10 00    Set footing dimension as 3 417 X3 417 X10 00  after checking service load conditions   Set footing dimension as 3 417 X3 417 X10 00  after checking design load conditions   Performing punching shear check        After design is completed a new tab called Isofoot Design Summary  will appear in output pane  Click that tab to view design summary  table  You can copy this table by selecting it and then by pressing  Ctrl C key which then can be pasted in Microsoft Excel or Word     Main Steel Secondary Steel  3 Spacing          If you choose uniform thickness footing type  the Isofoot Design  Summary table will be as given above     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manua
37.  Fixed Width    Choose    Yes    or    No    respectively for setting the dimension fixed  during check or optimize it     Minimum Left over hang length       Start length of left over hang for design     Minimum Right over hang length       Start length of right over hang for design     Minimum Width       Start width for design     Minimum Thickness       Start thickness for design     Maximum length       If    Calculate Dimension    is chosen then the maximum range of  length to check     Maximum Width       tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 175    If    Calculate Dimension    is chosen then the maximum range of  width to check     Maximum Thickness       If    Calculate Dimension    is chosen then the maximum range of  thickness to check     Length Increment       Increment of length reguired for the iteration process of design if     Calculate Dimension    Is chosen     Thickness Increment       Increment of thickness reguired for the iteration process of design  if    Calculate Dimension    Is chosen     Set as Default    As described earlier     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 176   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 7 3 4 Design    Next click on    Design     The design progress report will be  generated in the    Design Progress Report    window     Processing Footing C1    PO I D    RR AA AA AA    Starting Serviceability Check    AA AA AA AA AAA AA    Proc
38.  M  ljoooixyo0000vwy y K  My  lo 0 00001xy xy 0 0  y       Al 1010000001 x y 0  x    Al 000001010  y 0x y de    a  through a 3   constants of stress polynomials   The distinguishing features of this finite element are     1  Displacement compatibility between the plane stress component  of one element and the plate bending component of an adjacent  element which is at an angle to the first  see Figure below  is  achieved by the elements  This compatibility requirement is  usually ignored in most flat shell plate elements     tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 9       2  The out of plane rotational stiffness from the plane stress  portion of each element is usefully incorporated and not treated  as a dummy as is usually done in most commonly available  commercial software     3  Despite the incorporation of the rotational stiffness mentioned  previously  the elements satisfy the patch test absolutely     4  These elements are available as triangles and quadrilaterals   with corner nodes only  with each node having six degrees of  freedom     5  These elements are the simplest forms of flat shell plate  elements possible with corner nodes only and six degrees of  freedom per node  Yet solutions to sample problems converge  rapidly to accurate answers even with a large mesh size     6  These elements may be connected to plane space frame  members with full displacement compatibility  No additional  restraints releases are required     7  Out of plane shear
39.  MX  kip ft ft   59 277     53 923   48 569   43 215   37 860   32 506   27 152   21 798  16 444   11 089  5735    0 381   4 973   10 327  15 682  21 036  26 390       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    3 56    3 15    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 3     Quick Tour    Slab Design    Now we go for designing the slab  Slab design in  STAAD foundation has three distinct parts  First step is to generate  moment envelope  Next step is to design the slab and the last step is  to create reinforcement zones for reinforcement layout     Please click on the Moment envelope generation leaf under    Mat  slab design options    group in main navigator pane         Mat slab design options   5 Analyze    Output View Options     5 Moment envelope generation     5 Design Parameters   5 Reinforcement Zoning   85 Cut slab by a line    5 Calculation sheet    The moment envelope generation dialog box will appear in the  Data Area pane as shown in the following figure  Here we need to  setup slab longitudinal axis  We can setup the axis by simply  clicking at two points on the view or typing  x  z  coordinate  As  our slab is rectangular and parallel to global axis system we will  use Global X axis as slab longitudinal axis  A X axis can be defined  by  0 0  and  100 0  coordinates     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 57    Data Input Pane    sa      Envelope Generation    Select current panel    Boundary N  Longitudinal axis setup       By drawing 
40.  Moment Envelope   Wood and Armer    Section 3     Quick Tour    Set Design Parameters     C  Design for Ultimate load type only                            A  1      603   2 00  12 08  Top j  0 23      Bottom 4  0 23 i    603   1 50  12 10  Top pr 10 23  as es    Bottom ka 1 10 23  604   1 00  1210  Top 0 73 Te  0 23    Bottom 0 00 1  0 23  605   0 50  12 10  Top 113 te  0 23  E  _  Potom  oo p joz  605   0 00  12 10 Top 1 53 1  0 23 Si             Print    Close    Select the Close button to dismiss the Design Report Along a  Selected Line dialog box     Save your work  Pull down the File menu and select the Save    command     3 69       tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 70   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 16    Pile Cap Example    Now let us create a new job inside this same project to illustrate the  process for designing a pile cap     Click on the    Create a new Job    leaf under    Job Setup    group in  main navigator pane  The Create a New Job form will open in data  area pane  Enter job name as    PileCap     Choose Job type as    Pile  Cap    and design code as US  Select support node    1    in main view   Support assignment type will be automatically switched to    Assign  to selected support        Transfer both load cases to    Selected load cases    by clicking     button  Now click on    Create Job    button to create a new job to  design footing 1 as pile cap     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 7
41.  Reaction Reaction Summary    Contact Area A Plate Stress    Plate Stress Summary       Click on the Displacement tab to view nodal displacement for    current selected load case     tamilnavarasam com       Section 3     Quick Tour  3 49              0 274945   0 262900   0 250547  0 000000  0 002180  0 000000 0 000962   0 239450  0 000000  0 002141  0 000000 0 000791   0 231245  0 000000  0 002110  0 000000 0 000500   0 227239  0 000000  0 002094  0 000000 0 000120                                          This table lists the node displacement for the three translational and  three rotational degrees of freedom  Click on    Disp Summary    tab  to view node displacement summary for all six degrees of freedom  among all load cases  Please note  maximum positive displacement  in Y direction is 0 049418 in and maximum negative displacement  is  792751 in           0 000000  0 296130  0 000000  0 002332  0 000000 0 000834                         693 0 000000 0 049418 0 000000 0 000150 0 000000  0 000102  1320 0 000000  0 792751  0 000000 0 005146 0 000000  0 003932  1 0 000000   0 296130 0 000000  0 002332  0 000000 0 000834  1 0 000000  0 296130  0 000000  0 002332 0 000000 0 000834  1144 0 000000  0 523888  0 000000 0 006002 0 000000  0 003256  220 0 000000  0 519242  0 000000  0 005586  0 000000  0 003260       0 000000  0 296130  0 000000  0 002332 0 000000 0 000834  0 000000  0 296130  0 000000  0 002332 0 000000 0 000834  0 000000  0 472672  0 000000 0 004098 0 000000 0 0
42.  Row spacing     column spacing     in     Row Spacing       Column spacing      Origin x     e      Origin Y  0           Origin 2               al  Preview    GoooccocoooD  ooococoooD  0000000000  0000000000  O00000000  CO 000000000  0000000000  000000000  0000000000  0000000000       Apply  It will transfer the pile layout to the main view and add  piles to the current mat foundation job  Please note  you should  input origin to move the layout to the right position     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 102   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 6 3 3 3    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    Circular Pile Arrangement Wizard   Parametric     This is a parametric wizard like input to create circular pile layout   Generated pile coordinates will be in local coordinate system where  center of the circle is at 0 0 0 position  You need to move pile  group to the right location by inputting Origin X  Origin Y and  Origin Z     The following commands and options are available to generate  circular pile layout     Unit  Length Unit for pile spacing  Number of Piles  Total number of piles in pile group  Number of Circular layers   Number of concentric circular pile layers   Pile Spacing  Minimum spacing between two piles in above mentioned length unit   Center Pile  Check this box if you want to add a pile at the center of the circle  which is at 0 0 0  If you check this box program will automatically  add an extra piles to the total count of 
43.  STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Pile Arrangement Predefined    Support for Pile Arrangement 1 v  Pile Capacity    Unit   Lateral    40  Vertical     60 Uplift    40  peoa     sacra   3    Pile Arrangement Type         Auto Arrangement     Calculate     Manual Arrangement   Column location at  0 0                         tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 75    The following pile arrangement data and commands are available     e Support for Pile Arrangement  e Pile Capacity   e Pile Diameter   e Spacing   e Edge Distance   e Show Loading on Support  e Pile Arrangement Type   e Calculate   e Delete Selected Rows   e Show Pile Reactions   e Select Arrangement    Support for Pile Arrangement    The Support for Pile Arrangement drop down list box allows you to  select a support from the current job for which you would like to  input pile arrangement     Pile Capacity    The Pile Capacity group box allows you to input the forces that a  pile is meant to bear     Unit    The Unit drop down list box allows you to select the force unit  used for Pile Capacity     Lateral    The Lateral field allows you to specify the lateral force a pile is  meant to bear     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 76   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Vertical    The Vertical field allows you to specify the vertical force a pile is  meant to bear     Uplift  The Uplift fiel
44.  Safety Factors page  click on the Safety Factors leaf under Loads  and Factors group in Main Navigator pane     A table allowing you to input serviceability and design factors for  each load case will be displayed in the Data Area pane     Safety Factor                      By default  STAAD foundation will assign values for the safety  factors depending on the load type  Refer to section 4 3 3 2 fora  detailed explanation of the default values  The default values can  be changed by inputting new values into the table like any  spreadsheet  The tab key or arrow keys may be used to move from  one cell to the next in the table  The serviceability factor will be  applied when checking the base pressure of a foundation   geotechnical design   The design factor will be used for design     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 19  3 5 Using Jobs to Specify Design Constraints    Now that all the global project data has been inputted  you have the  ability to design the foundation using Isolated Supports  Pile Caps   Strip Footing or you could support the entire structure on a single  Mat Foundation  You will not have to create separate input files for  entering all this information  All you have to do is to create  separate jobs under the same project  In order to create a job  click  on Create a New Job leaf under the job setup group in Main  Navigator pane     B  Job Setup   3g Create a New Job        5 Edit Current Job   5 Delete Job    A form to create a new job wi
45.  The Main navigator pane represents all the major steps reguired to  complete a foundation project  The tree leaves under any group on  navigational tree manage the display of forms that appear in the  Data Area pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 8   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 4 Global Data    The main navigator pane Global Data groups are as followings    e Project Info                        General Information  Review History  Modeling view options  Scale setup options    e Foundation Plan                        Linear grid setup  Radial grid setup  Column Position  Column Dimension    e Loads and Factors     gt  Create a new load case   gt  Adda Column Reaction Load   gt  Add a Point Load  for Mat only    gt  Add a Line Load  for Mat only      Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only    gt  Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only    gt  Add Member Load  7 Add Uniform Load    Add Concentrated Load  7 Add Trapezoidal Load     Safety Factor Table   gt  Create New Load Combination   gt  Remove Load Case  e Job Setup   gt  Create a New Job   gt  Edit Current Job   gt  Delete Job    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 9    Note  STAAD foundation does not display the entire tree all the  time  Rather  it only displays groups and leaves that are  relevant to the current status of the project  For example  when  you begin a new project  only t
46.  The comments for a given revision will  be shown in the Comments box if you select the respective revision  in the table  The Save button should be clicked after inserting any  new revision history data to update the revision history table  If  you want to delete a particular revision history record  simply  select the record by clicking on the respective Id and click on the  Delete button  If you want to delete the entire revision history   click on Delete All     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 9    3 3 Entering Support Coordinates    To enter the coordinates for supports that construct the foundation  plan of a project  click on the leaf called Column Position under  Foundation Plan group in Main Navigator pane     5 3 STAAD foundation Member      3 Project Info     General Information   E Review History   y Modeling View Options  Dep Scale setup options     3 Foundation Plan    fe Linear Grid Setup    A Radial Grid Setup       sp Column Dimension    A table allowing you to input the coordinates of supports will be  displayed in the Data Area pane                             Input the support coordinates  0 0 0    10 0 0    10 0 10    0 0 15     14 0 0  and  5 0 5  for Nodes 1  2  3  4  5 and 6 respectively   Please make sure length unit is set as    ft     The tab key or the arrow    tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 10   Section 3     Quick Tour    keys may be used to move from one cell to the next
47.  Two types of load combinations are used here  They are    Allowable  Load Combination    and    Ultimate Load Combination        Allowable Load Combination        Allowable load combinations are load combinations used to check  soil pressure and optimize footing plan dimensions     Ultimate Load Combination        Ultimate load combinations are load combinations used to check  for shear and design for reinforcement     tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 27    The two tables represent these two load combinations i e   Allowable Load Combination and Ultimate Load Combination   The cells represent the factors to be added with the primary load  cases  depending upon the rules of the US Standard     After adding load cases  clicking on the Generate Load  Combination Button for the specific table  the loads will be  generated with the factors  taken from the table  and will be added  in the Load Tree  The child node of each load combination node  will represent the Load Case and the factors multiplied with it     The load combination number starts from 101 and you can also give  load combination number of your own choice  If the number exists   the load combination number is automatically incremented with  each new load combination as    Load Comb    and the number     You can create any number of load combination and can save it  using an INI file  This file exits in the program installation  directory as    ACILOAD INI     This saved load combin
48.  active only when the region type will be  selected as Hole or Control Region  Select the boundary to which  the hole or control region will be added    Maximum element size  It   s the size of one side of a plate element to be created  This  parameter will be used by mesh generation engine to generate  plates  This option allows you to control meshing density and plate  counts which in turn control analysis run time and output size    Optimize based on area  It   s an optimization technique to be used only for triangular plate  generation for non quad mat boundary  By default  program    optimize meshing based on element size     Generate Mesh    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 116   Section 4   STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    Click on this button to generate mesh of the selected bounding  region  Once you click on the Create Mesh button  a dialog box will  appear allowing you to choose the type of meshing to create  The  following two types of meshing are available     e Quadrilateral Meshing  e Polygonal Meshing     Please choose Meshing Type l x     Quadrilateral Meshing     Polygonal Meshing Cancel         A Ouadrilateral Mesh works well for slabs with guadrilateral  boundaries and when there is no hole or control region  A  Polygonal Mesh is the better choice for slabs with irregular shapes   like a Y shaped slab  or slabs with round holes  irregular shaped  holes  round edges  etc     After you have se
49.  com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 6   Section 3     Quick Tour    The default page that opens when starting a new project is the  General Information page  The General Information page may also  be invoked by clicking on the General Information leaf under Main  Navigator tab        4  STAAD foundation Member      Project Info   5 Review History   6 Modeling View Options   Sy Scale setup options    The General Information page opens a form in the Data Area pane  that allows you to store project related data     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 7    Project ID  Project Title  Site Location          Organization  Contact Person  Phone   Fax   Email   Address                         Start Date Jul  25 2007  Target Date Jul  25 2007                The information inputted on the General Information page can later  be used in reports and drawings     In addition to the General Information page  there is also another  leaf called Review History  Invoke the page by clicking on the  Review History under the Project Info group        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 8   Section 3     Quick Tour    A form will be displayed in the Data Area pane that allows you to  keep track of the progress of a project     Review History                                   Comments                  Delete      Delete al          A date  job name  checked by and comments may be entered for  each revision of a project 
50.  for Two Way Shear  Vumax   1500 KN    1500x1000          0 698 N mm   4x 960x560    Developed shear stress T      K    min  0 5 1 1    1    tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 5    Allowable shear stress   K  x 7    1x 0 25  fc   0 968 N mm        Note  We are not deducting the upward force underneath the  area enclosed by the critical perimeter  because in this way we  are in the conservative side        Spacing  2646 4x4  No  of 10 mm bar                     33 69  34   zx10x10    3500   50x 2 10  Spacing            102 73 mm    34 1    Spacing for 10 mm bar   102 73 mm    WB  109 C E  BOTH WAYS  15 BARS    PLAN OF REINFORCEMENT       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    6 6    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual       Section 5     Indian Verification Problems       404 CM UMK  BARS    Ang E oomecS    ibg Bone     IS CLC  am COVER  ai f N Sotu wavs       ecovom q a    Sectional clevation showing reinforcement                                        Comparison  Reference STAAD foundation Difference  Value Of    Result Result in Percent  Effecti  Pn 560 mm 560 mm None  Depth  Governing aa  514 826 KN m 514 821 KN m Negligible  Moment  A f  Hina 2646 40 mm  2645 01 mm  0 05  Steal  Shear  Stress 0 216 N mm  0 216 N mm  None   One Way   Shear  Stress 0 698 N mm  0 700 N mm  0 286   Two Way   Table 6 1    tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 7    6 2 Indian Verification Problem 2    Reference       Rei
51.  forces  The unit used for this form is set through the    Setup  Input Output unit    in the toolbar                           Rectangular  see  O Circular _     Rectangular         1 00 14 00                1 00                       If the column type is Circular    Column Width    field will be grayed  out  If you have pedestal you can select    Yes    radio button under  Consider Pedestal field  If you select    Yes    the fields for Pedestal  Height  depth and width will be editable     By default program considers that there is no pedestal     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 30   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 4 3 The Loads  amp  Factors    F5 Loads  amp  Factors   5 Create New Load Case   E Add a Column Reaction Load    amp  Add a Point Load  for Mat only    Ez Add a Line Load  for Mat only    6 Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only    6 Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only        7 Add Member Load    Add Uniform Load  KS Add Concentrated Load    gt  Add Trapezoidal Load   5 Safety Factor Table   7 Create New Load Combination   S7 Remove Load Case    The Loads  amp  Factors group allows you to define the loads on a  foundation by creating load cases  loads  combination loads  and  safety factors for load cases     The Load  amp  Factors group contains the following elements    e New Load Case  e Add a Column Reaction Load  e Add a Point Load  e Add a Line Load  e Add a Quadrilate
52.  foundation Graphical Environment   5 41    The default value for this field is 1  1 25 and 1 5  But the input  control for this value is not a read only combo box  so you can  enter your own desired value     Fundamental Period  T        Fundamental period in both the direction  longitudinal and  transverse  have to be provided with the Period for Long Transition  defined in section 11 4 5     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    5 42   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment  5 3 6 Load Combination Page    Two types of load combinations are used here  They are    Allowable  Load Combination    and    Ultimate Load Combination     You can  create any number of load combination and can save it using an INI  file  This file exits in the program installation directory as     ACILOAD INI     This saved load combination will be application  specific i e  they are independent of file saving  Following figure  shows the load combination page     Allowable Load Combination     Update Table         gt           0 00 0 00 0 00  0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00     0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00  0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00    ut                                 OR  Ultimate Load Combination     Update Table         gt                                      The first column indicates the index of the load combination  The  second row has a check  Check on the check boxes of the  combination which you want to use  The cell with zero values  appears in gray 
53.  in the table   The supports along with their respective node numbers are  displayed in the Graphics Window     To change set current length unit please click on the    Set  Input Output Unit    in the toolbar     Note  Supports will not be shown in the Graphics Window until  you click on a cell outside of the row you are currently in        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 11    3 4 Defining the Loads    In order to define loads  please click on the Loads  amp  Factors  group in the Main Navigator pane         STAAD foundation Member     Project Info   Sy General Information   Sy Review History  E Modeling View Options    amp  Scale setup options     Foundation Plan   57 Linear Grid Setup   5  Radial Grid Setup  E Column Position    27 Column Dimension      5 Loads  amp  Factors  I   Create New Load Case    By default  the Load Description page will open in the Data Area  pane  The Load Description page allows you to define loads for  load cases  as well as assign loads  To create a load case  click on  the New Load Case leaf under the Loads  amp  Factors group in Main    Navigator   o  Loads  amp  Factors   S5 Create New Load Case      amp  Add a Column Reaction Load    amp  Add a Point Load  for Mat only     amp   Add a Line Load  for Mat only     gt  Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only     amp  Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only   BI Add Member Load    amp  Add Uniform Load   o gt  Add Concentrated Load   Gy Add Trapezoidal Load    
54.  ki    B  197        fa  X   maa Fe 4  lt  g   10 393    Covers   12 992 A A      E Top cover 3 in    E 5 590    a    188 Bottom cover  3 in xj   20 787  B   385 Rebar      Tas 983 Bar size 4       g2 Spacing 2 o fn   31 180  Bs 778 Choose Slab Face i  B aft e    Longitudinal Top zj  R    975 DE   41 574 lot Capacity Diagram     Plot Failure Diagram    Actual moment diagram plot for  Longitudinal Top    tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  6 36   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems       is Detail Drawing _ Layout Drawing   Calculation Sheet   Strip Footing Graph b Data Input Pane             ax  h Mat Capacity Check A   Grades   Fy feo  ksi z       k mE  Covers   Top cover 3 fin Fi  Bottom cover  3 jin     Rebar   Bar size fa      Spacing 12 in ind   Choose Slab Face     Longitudinal Top x       Plot Capacity Diagram  ea Plot Moment Diagram        Plot Failure Diagram         Unity check diagram where green  indicates pass and red indicates failure    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    
55.  radius of the grid     Show Grid    The Show Grid field toggles the display of the grid in the Graphics  Window     Save As Default    Selecting Yes in this field will save the grid data to be used in  future projects     Generate    The Generate Grid command button creates the specified grid in  the Graphics Window     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 27    Grid Direction   The Grid Direction option allows you to specify in what direction  you would like to edit the grid using the table and commands  available below     Circumferential    The Circumferential option allows you to edit the grid lines along  the circumference of the grid     Radial    The Radial option allows you to edit the grid lines along the radius  of the grid     Edit Grid Line s    The Edit Grid Line s  group box allows you to edit the grid lines of  a grid  You can edit the grid lines by changing the values in the  table or by using the command buttons     Insert After    The Insert After command button inserts a grid line after the row  selected in the grid line table     Insert Before    The Insert Before command button inserts a grid line before the  row selected in the grid line table     Delete    The Delete command button deletes the selected row in the grid  line table     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 28   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 4 2 2 Column Positions        Foundation P
56.  screen  the Main Navigator pane is a  tree control  Clicking on any leaf of the tree opens a new page on  the Data Input pane that allows you to perform specific tasks for a  project  The organization of the Main Navigator leaves  from top to  bottom  represents the logical sequence of operations for a project   such as definition of footing positions  specification of loads and  factors  mesh generation  and so on  If you go through the pages    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 5    from top to bottom and enter all the data that is relevant to a  project  you will end up with a successful model     A detailed discussion of the facilities included in the Main  Navigator pane is provided in Section 4 3 of this manual     Data Input Pane    Located in the right of the screen  the Data Input pane is where you  enter all relevant data for a project  The Data Input pane contains  different forms  dialog boxes  tables  and list boxes depending on  the type of operation you are performing  For example  when you  click on the Column Dimension leaf  a Column Dimension table is  displayed in the Data Input pane  when you click on the Plate  Thickness button  the contents of the Data Input pane change to  display the Plate Thickness dialog box     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 6   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment  4 3 The Navigator Controls        amp  STAAD fou
57.  strain energy is incorporated in the  formulation of the plate bending component  As a result  the  elements respond to Poisson boundary conditions that are  considered to be more accurate than the customary Kirchoff  boundary conditions     8  The plate bending portion can handle thick and thin plates  thus  extending the usefulness of the plate elements into a  multiplicity of problems  In addition  the thickness of the plate  is taken into consideration in calculating the out of plane shear     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  2 10   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    9  The plane stress triangle behaves almost on par with the well   known linear stress triangle  The triangles of most similar flat  shell elements incorporate the constant stress triangle that has  very slow rates of convergence  Thus the triangular shell  element is very useful in problems with double curvature where  the quadrilateral element may not be suitable     10  Stress retrieval at nodes and at any point within the element     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 11    2 4 Element Local Coordinate System    The precise orientation of local coordinates is determined as  follows     1  The vector pointing from I to J is defined to be parallel to the  local X axis     2  The cross product of vectors IJ and IK defines a vector parallel  to the local Z axis  i e   z   IJ x IK     3  The cross product of vectors z and x defines a vec
58.  to specify the origin of the  grid     Unit  The Unit field allows you to select the current length unit of the    grid system  You can change the unit by clicking on that field and  selecting desired unit from the drop down list     Origin X    The Origin X field allows you to specify the X coordinate of the  grid origin     Origin Y    The Origin Y field allows you to specify the Y coordinate of the  grid origin     Origin Z    The Origin Z field allows you to specify the Z coordinate of the  grid origin     Radius and Division    The Radius and Division group box allows you to specify the inner  and outer radius of the grid and grid divisions     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 26   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Inner Radius of the Grid       The Inner Radius of the Grid field allows you to specify the inner  radius of the grid using the units selected in the Change Length  Unit drop down list box in the Tools toolbar     Outer Radius of the Grid       The Outer Radius of the Grid field allows you to specify the outer  radius of the grid using the units selected in the Change Length  Unit drop down list box in the Tools toolbar     Number of Divisions    Along Circumference       The Along Circumference field allows you to specify the number of  divisions along the circumference of the grid     Along Radius    The Along Radius field allows you to specify the number of  divisions along the
59.  under Analysis Properties group     5 5 Analysis properties  E Slab thickness    amp  Soil property    amp  Pile spring    The Soil Properties page will be displayed in the Data Area pane   Check on the check box for soil spring     v  Use soil spring   0 040       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 45    3 14 Analyzing the Slab    We are ready to analyze the slab  Save your work one more time   pull down the File menu and select the Save command     Click on the Analyze leaf under    Mat Slab design Options    group  to analyze the mat     5  Mat slab design options    Output View Options   3 Moment envelope generation   5 Design Parameters   6 Reinforcement Zoning   5 Cut slab by a line   5 Calculation sheet    Design progress report tab under Output group will be populated    with progress messages while the program creates an analytical  model to analyze     Output oo    Translating meshed Coordinates          ranslating Beams     Translating Plates     Creating Plates and assigning plate property     Processing Load Info     Processing Load case 1  Processing Load case 2    Hari Design Progress Report    Then another window will come up and show the analysis progress  messages and status  When the analysis is completed that window  will automatically disappear     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 46   Section 3     Quick Tour       STAAD Analysis and Design       Factorization done    of non zeros  25
60.  will be multiplied by the  specified factor  To remove a load case from the Load  Combinations  select the load case in the grid on the bottom and          click the    button  To remove all load cases  click on the    button     Finally click on    Create Job    to create a new job  Please note  new  job will be set as current job and will be shown in    Change Job     dropdown toolbar        Mat_Examp08 1  1 4DL   1  AL     Strip Combined footing  If we select Job Type as combined  a new  set of controls appear at the bottom of the Job Setup form  Those  controls will initially be grayed out  Click on    Create Job    to  activate those controls     Strip Footing        Strip footing setup      Footing C1  Support 2  Support 3       8 Create from Selected Nodes    Delete Al       Select two or more collinear supports in main view and then click  on    Create from Selected Nodes    button to add those supports as  strip footing     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 57    4 5 2 Edit Current Job    Click on Edit Current Job leaf under Job Setup group to edit the  current job setup  All the fields in job setup can be edited except  Job Type  If you need to change the list of assigned support you can  use any of the assignment options as discussed earlier  By default  Support assignment option is set as Assign to Listed supports     Strip1       Job Type Combined       Design Code jus       Default Unit Type 
61.  xd    1205 524 mm  fcx Bxdexde    Minimum area of steel Ast      0 0012 x B x D   1104 90 mm   Check for One Way Shear    100Ast  Percentage of steel p      0 183    Bxde       Corresponding allowable T     0 303 N mm     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 14   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Vu max    Developed shear stress 7     BX de   V u max   0 00 KN   Developed shear stress T    0 00  lt  T oai  Hence safe   Check for Two Way Shear   Vu  max   1500 KN    1500x1000  Developed shear stress T         N mm  4x854x 454      967 203 KN m   K    min  0 541  1     Allowable shear stress   K  x T   1x 0 254 fe    968 246 KN m     gt  developed T   hence safe     Spacing  1205 524 x 4  No  of 12 mm bar                        10 66  11   mxX12x12  i 1450    100x 2   12  Spacing     123 8 mm       11 1    Spacing for 12 mm bar   123 8 mm    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems                                                                      1000  KN    Bottom Reinforcement  f  if       5 Zz 635 mm  a   gt   Pil   Comparison  Reference STAAD foundation Difference in  Value Of  Result Result Percent  Effective  454 mm 454 mm None  Depth  Governing   997 5 KN m 187 5 KN m None  Moment  Area of 2 2  1205 524 mm 1204 886 mm 0 058  Steal  Shear  Stress 0 967 N mm  0 967 N mm  None   Two Way   Table 6 3    6 15    tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual 
62. 00  Unit    Select the unit of the position of the applied point load on mat     x     2     To create a Point Load  first select the Force and Moment Units to  use for the load  Then input the magnitude of the forces  Fx  Fy   Fz  and moments  Mx  My  Mz   Next  input the loading position   X  Y  Z  and select the Unit measurement for the loading position   Finally  click on Add Load button to include the load     Note  The Y Loading Position must correspond to the elevation  of the foundation supports        tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 35  4 4 3 4 Adda Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only     Clicking on the Add Quadrilateral Load leaf opens a form that  allows you to create a Quadrilateral Load  Quadrilateral Loads are  plate pressure load and only applicable to mat foundations     5  Pressure A    Pressure 0 000000              Value of the pressure acting on a quadrilateral area on mat  Enter a    ve value f the pressure is vertically downward    txl z1  x4 24        x2 22   x3 23       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 36   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    To create a Quadrilateral Load  first select the Dimension and  Pressure Units to use for the load  Then input the magnitude of the  load in the Pressure field  Next  input the elevation at which the  load is applied in the Y Coord field  Now  define the area or     footprint    of the load by inputting the c
63. 000  0 000000   7 500260   4 694698   13 465384  1158  2  15 832063  5 545430  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  4 200468  1 543481 1 15 353448       Displacement Disp Summary A Reaction Reaction Summary Contact Area 4 Plate Stress   Plate Stress Summary         To view plate stress contours please click on the    Output View  Options    leaf under    Mat slab design options    group    3  Mat slab design options    amp  Analyze    Moment envelope generation   3 Design Parameters  E Reinforcement Zoning     2 Cut slab by a line    amp  Calculation sheet    A form will appear at data area pane  Please select    Show Plate  Stress    radio button and then choose    Global Mx    stress type     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 54   Section 3     Quick Tour    Output View Options       Displacement Diagram Setup    Show Nodal Displacement    Use Average Normal   Show Beam Displacement  Drawing Options      Draw Line Diagram    Draw 3D diagram    Stress Contour    Show Beam Stress     Show Plate Stress o ya    Show Soil Pressure  Plate Stress Settings       Select Stress Type   None  v    None   Max Absolute   Max Top   Max Bottom   Max Yon Mis   Select Stress Type   Max Yon Mis Top  Max Von Mis Bottom    Beam Stress Setting    Global M     Global MZ    The screen will look like the following figure  Please note that this  contour is based on the global X axis     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 55       Global
64. 03573  0 000000  0 579236  0 000000 0 004439 0 000000  0 004835             ah   a     a     a     ad   a                 ad   a           a5                               Please click on the    Support Reactions    tab to view soil pressure for  the current load case  To know maximum reaction among all load  cases please click on    Reaction Summary    tab     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    3 50   Section 3     Quick Tour       STAAD  foundation     User s Manual                                                 1192 1 1 496520042419   1 239615082741  0 256951004  0 10 003218750  0  1230 1 481767001152 3 298341035843  0 284902005  0  0 000755416 0  1275 1 aa 3 902505636215 0 To fo 0  371 1 0 lo 0 jo 0  154 1 0 1348859965801  2 467761039734 0 2048510015 0    00016398200  1230 2  1 218780040741  2 879165887833  5 640240192 0  0 856886982  0  1 1 o 0 421932607889 0 o lo 0  1 1 0 0 421932607889  0 0 0 0  1192 2 1 244420051575  1 088517308235  2 414170026  0 4461840152  0  136 1 106895005703   1 036438703537 0 1835380047  0 0 00 0  1 1 0 0 421932607889 0 0 jo 0  1 1 0 0 421932607889 0 0 fo    0                      Kan Reaction Sum    To view soil pressure contour  please click on the    Output View    Options    leaf under    Mat slab design options    group in main    navigator pane         Mat slab design options   2 Output View Options        amp y Moment envelope generation    E Design Parameters  E Reinforcement Zoning   257 Cut slab by a line    A form called
65. 1       English  Assign to selected support                Loading    Available Load Cases      cz ca    4 EZ  gt   Selected Load Cases      1   1 4DL   1 7LL   2   75 1 4DL  1 7LL   1 7WL           Enter a name for the job in the New Job Name edit box   Notice that your New Job Name now appears in the drop down  menu in the Jobs toolbar     Peco      RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 72   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 17 Entering Pile Data    Also  please note main navigator tree is now changed with pile cap  related controls  For pile cap jobs  a unique group called Pile Cap  Job will be created in the main navigator pane        Pile Cap Job   5 Pile Layout Predefined     gt  Pile Layout Parametric    5 Design Parameters    Design    We first need to create pile arrangement for pile cap  To create pile  arrangement please click on the    Pile Layout Predefined     leaf        Pile Cap Job    gt  Pile Layout Predefined    5 Pile Layout Parametric      Ss Design Parameters  KS Design    The Pile Arrangement page will be displayed in the Data Area pane  as shown in following figure     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 73       Pile Arrangement Predefined    Support for Pile Arrangement 1  Pile Capacity    Unit   kip M  Lateral   0    Vertical    0 Uplift   0    Pile Arrangement Type       Auto Arrangement     Calculate     Manual Arrangement   Column location at  0 0                             
66. 11 12 2 1  Bo for column   2  Beat Deot 2 X deg    216 00 in    Equation 11 35  V4    2    xp xdex   TO00 Fi  344258 k    ad    Equation 11 36  Vo     soneg xan  1000xF   5610 13 k    ip  Equation 11 37  Vig   4X BoX dex 41000 XF i  2295 05 kip  Punching shear strength  V    minimum of  V4  Yoo  Mog    2295 05 kip       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 28   Section 3     Quick Tour    This calculation sheet is web enabled for real time checking  Hard  copies can also be made from this sheet   A project once created can be saved and re opened later using the    File   Save and File   Open options  STAAD foundation files are  saved with  afs extension     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 29    3 8 Importing Structural Geometry and Analysis  Results from STAAD  Pro    In most cases the forces and moments on the foundation are given  by the analysis of the superstructure  To ensure a seamless and  efficient integration with the analysis software  STAAD foundation  includes an    Import    facility  This option allows us to import the  support co ordinates and forces moments on the individual supports  from a structural analysis software program     At present we have the facility to import analysis data from  STAAD Pro structural analysis software  Thus by default the  control goes to the folder where STAAD Pro example files are  located  If you do not have STAAD Pro installed in your machine   please do not us
67. 4   104  4 105  4 106  4 107  4 109  4 111  4 113  4 118  4 124  4 125  4 128  4 131  4 132  4   133  4   134  4 135  4   136  4 137  4   138  4 144  4 145  4 149  4 152  4 157  4 162  4   163  4 164  4   166  4   169  4 170  4 172  4 174  4 178  4 180  4 181  4   183  4   184  4 187  4 189  4 188  4 189  4 199  4   200  4   203  4   209    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 10 1    4 10 2  4 10 3  4 10 4  4 10 5    File Toolbar  4 10 1 1 File Toolbar  4 10 1 2 Print Toolbar  4 10 1 3 Import Toolbar  4 10 1 4 Save Picture Toolbar  4 10 1 5 Change Job Toolbar  4 10 1 6 Change Current Load Case Toolbar  4 10 1 7 Tools Toolbar  4 10 1 8 Loading Toolbar  4 10 1 9 View option Toolbar  4 10 1 10 Scale Setup Toolbar  4 10 1 11 Unit Setup Toolbar   Help Toolbar   Rotate Toolbar   Zoom Toolbar   Select Toolbar    Section5 Plant Foundation    5 1    5 2    5 3    Introduction    5 1 1    Creating a New Plant Setup Job    Vertical Vessel Foundation    5 2 1  5 2 2  5 2 3  5 2 4  5 2 5  5 2 6  5 2 7  5 2 8  5 2 9    Geometry Page   Primary Load Page   Time Period Page   Wind Load Generation Page  Seismic Load Generation Page  Load Combination Page  Design Parameter Page  Foundation Type Page   Finish and Design    Heat Exchanger Foundation    5 3 1  5 3 2  5 33  5 3 4  5 3 5  5 3 6  5 3 7  5 3 8    Section 6    6 1  6 2  6 3  6 4  6 5    Exchanger Geometry Page  Footing Geometry Page  Primary Load Page   Wind Load Generation Page  Seismic Load Generation Page  Load Combination Page  D
68. 5141       Finished Advanced Solver factor  1 sec     Advanced Solver Processing Loads   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Backsubstitution For Solutions   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Saving displacement   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Assembling      Plates   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Processing Matrix   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Factorizing Matrix   17 20 48     Factor at equation  3000 of   3960 17 20 48  Factorization done    of non zeros  255141 17 20 48     Finished Advanced Solver factor  0 sec     Advanced Solver Processing Loads   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Backsubstitution For Solutions   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Saving displacement   17 20 48     Tension   Comp  converged  Iters  4 Case 1     Calculating Member Forces  17 20 48     Advanced Solver Assembling      Plates   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Processing Matrix   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Factorizing Matrix   17 20 48     Factor at equation  3000 of   3960 17 20 48  Factorization done    of non zeros  255141 17 20 48     Finished Advanced Solver factor  0 sec     Advanced Solver Processing Loads   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Backsubstitution For Solutions   17 20 48     Advanced Solver Saving displacement   17 20 48      Advanced Solver Assembling     Plates   17 20 48 v   lt    lx    D Erroris   0 Wamingis   bot     When you see the messages have stopped scrolling  look for a final  message     Analysis is completed    which indicates that the analysis  has been successfully performed     By defa
69. 52   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 5    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Job Setup    The link between global and local data is Job Setup where user can  create different footing job types  User can create as many jobs as  needed  Multiple jobs with same footing type are also allowed     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 53  4 5 1 Create a New Job       Job Setup    tera Create a New Job      amp  Edit Current Job   5 Delete Job    To create a new job click on Create a New job leaf under Job Setup  group which will open a form in data area pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    4 54   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Job Name  Job Type Isolated   Design Code US   Default Unit Type   English   Support Assignm   Assign to all support  Listed Supparts                         Loading  Available Load Cases              Selected Load Cases            Job setup form has two separate groups  The group on top is to  define Job type  unit etc  and the group at the bottom is to associate  loading with the job     Job Name  Job name is used to uniquely identify each job  You can  enter any string here     Job Type  It is used to define the foundation type for the new job   In current version we support 5 different types of footing which are    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 55    e Iso
70. 7    Next screen is the license agreement  By default the option is set to    I do not  accept the terms in the license agreement    and Next button is grayed  Select     I accept the terms in the license agreement    option to continue with the  installation     ig  STAAD foundation 4   InstallShield Wizard       Destination Folder A  Click Next to install to this folder  or click Change to install to a different folder        Install STAAD  foundation 4 to     C  Staad  foundation 4        Next screen allows user to choose destination folder  By default the  destination folder is set as    C  Staad foundation 4     Click on    Change    button  to change the folder location     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    1 8   Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up         i STAAD  foundation 4   InstallShield Wizard           Select Server Settings    Configure SELECT server information  You may choose to configure this  information later using    Bentley SELECT XM License Tool         SELECT Server Settings     Server Name  ficenseXm bentley com  Site Activation Key   1392sHePcoay Z4yY    Default email   Your Name  yourcompany com    When asked for SELECT Server name and site activation key  please enter  the information if you have those  For Standalone workstation set server  name to LocalHost and activation key to 1  For Bentley hosted or deployed   local  SELECT installations discussed later in this gui
71. 87 KN m None  Moment  A f  Na 2837 87 mm  2836 34 mm  0 05  Steel  Shear  Stress 0 3486 N mm  0 3486 N mm  None   One Way   Shear  Stress 0 96 N mm  0 96 N mm  None   Two Way   Table 6 2    6 11    tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 12   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    RangaRakes    6 3 Indian Verification Problem 3    Reference     Reinforced Concrete Design    by S N Sinha  Problem 11 12   Problem    Design a pile cap with the given data  Load Fy   1000 KN  Spacing    900 mm  Pile in Pile Cap   75 mm  Bottom Cover   100 mm   Edge Distance   275 mm  No  of Pile   4  Dia  of Pile   250 mm   fc   15 MPa  fy   415 MPa  Column Dimension   400mm x  400mm  Load Factor   1 5     1000 KN      hE       yw  ka     85 44    x    1450             HA  8 RR    e    30            8    150    e 4 250  e 400 ohm 250  gt t 150   no       Y       tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 13    Solution    Ultimate load   1 5 x 1000 KN   1500 KN        1500  Pile reaction    Total load   no  of pile             375 KN  4    Bending moment at critical section  at column face    M    2 x 375 x 0 25   187 5 KN m    Taking Effective depth d    454 mm    700                 0 479  1100   0 87 fy    Ky ma    Rau max   0 36 x fe x Ku max X  1  0 42 Ky max    2 066  Mujim   Ru max X B X de   617 462 KN m  gt  M   Hence safe   Area of Steel Required    Area of steel required along length           fe 4 6MU 5  Ast     0 5 x x  1 1 x B
72. AAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 1 1 Concrete and Rebar        Isolated Footing Job      Design Parameters  a Concrete  amp  Rebar      Cover  amp  Soil    gt  Footing Geometry    amp  Sliding  amp  Overturning    amp  Design    Clicking on the Concrete  amp  Rebar leaf opens a form in the Data    Area pane that allows you to input concrete and rebar properties     Concrete       RangaRakes    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 61    The following concrete and rebar properties are available     e Unit Weight of Concrete   e Strength of Concrete   e Yield Strength of Reinforcing Steel  e Minimum Bar Size   e Maximum Bar Size   e Minimum Bar Spacing   e Maximum Bar Spacing    Set as Default    The Set as Default check box allows you to use the values inputted  in the Concrete  amp  Rebar form as the default values for future  projects     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 62   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment  4 6 1 2 Cover and Soil         4  Isolated Footing Job      3  Design Parameters   55 Concrete  amp  Rebar     Si Footing Geometry    amp  Sliding  amp  Overturning    amp  Design    Clicking on the Cover and Soil leaf under Design Parameters group  opens a form in the Data Area pane that allows you to input cover  parameters and soil characteristics     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 63          
73. AMP1LS  size  1  121 KB    2  EXAMPO6 STD Injexamp12 si                  Filename   EXAMPO8 STD  Files of type   STAAD Pro Files    std       Cancel         tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 31    Locate the STAAD Pro US Example No  8 file and highlight it   Then click on Open     Import STAAD Pro file          1 4DL   1 7L    Primary  75 1 4DL   1 7LL   1 7WL   Primary       Select All       Import Supported Nodes    O Import Plates y Level  E    Design Code      Default Unit Type  FNGLUSH    Click on Import in the resulting dialog box  The support  coordinates will be imported to STAAD foundation as shown in the  graphics display window  Notice that you did not have to create a  new project  STAAD foundation did not overwrite the project you  already had open  or add any new data to it  Instead  the program  has created a new project with the default project name Untitled     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 32   Section 3     Quick Tour       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    3 9    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 33    Creating a New Job for a Mat Foundation    Click on the Create a new Job leaf under Job Setup in Main  Navigator pane to create a new job for designing the mat  foundation  The Create a New Job form will open in the data pane  area  Choose Job type as Mat foundation and design code as US     J Mat  comps   Ma                            Loading      Available Load Cases         Selected Load 
74. Cases      1   1 4DL   1 7LL   2   75 1 4DL  1 7LL   1 7WL           tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 34   Section 3     Quick Tour    The job will be assigned to all the supports  We then include all  the loadings on it from the Loading group of the same property  form  Now click on    Create Job    to create a new mat foundation  job     If we look at the Main Navigator pane we see a set of new groups  not seen in our previous project  These groups are related to mat  foundation analysis and design        Job Setup   5 Create a New Job    gt  Edit Current Job   5 Delete Job      Default analysis properties   5 Physical beam table   4 Pile Layout      Mesh generation   H 5 Analysis properties       Mat slab design options    The Meshing generation and Analysis properties groups are  particular to the mat foundation  We also see the Pile Layout group  which is to create pile arrangement in case the mat slab is  supported by piles instead of soil  These groups only appear when a  Mat Foundation job type is active     For our example  mat slab will be supported by soil  in other words  it   s a slab on grade problem     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 35  3 10 Defining the Mat Boundary    Now we would like to define the boundary of the mat  To do this  we expand    Mesh generation    group and then click on    Add a  rectangular region    leaf        Mat foundation Job   Sg Default analysis properties   3 Physical 
75. Contour    There are three types of contours available   1  Plate Stress  2  Beam Stress  3  Soil Pressure    If you select Show Plate Stress contour  Select Stress Type drop    down box will be enabled allowing you to choose stress type to  display  By default program shows stress type as None     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 140   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Two categories of plate stress contours are available  One set  displays contour for plate local axis system and the other set shows  global plate moment     Local stresses are    e Max Absolute   e Max Top   e Max Bottom   e Max Von Mis   e Max Von Mis Top   e Max Von Mis Bottom    e SX     SY   e SXY  e MX      MY   e MXY  e SQX      SQY    Global moments are available for both MX and MZ     After selecting suitable stress type program will display contour in  graphics window along with a legend     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 141    Global MX  kip in  in   68 637  62 423  56 209   49 995   43 780   37 566  31 352  25 138  18 924  412710  5 496  0 282  5 932  12146  18 360  24 574  30 788          Show Soil Pressure    If you choose stress contour type as Show Soil Pressure  program  will display soil pressure contour for the selected load case along  with a legend     Please note  soil pressure values are directly related to soil bearing  capacity  If the maximum pressure exceed
76. D foundation can automatically  absorb the geometry  loads and reactions from a STAAD Pro model  and accurately design isolated  pile cap  strip footing  true mat  foundations and even perform pile arrangements for a pile cap     STAAD  foundation not only analyzes and designs a myriad of  foundation configurations  but will also produce production quality  reports and detailed 3D rendering of your foundation structures   With full OpenGL graphics  engineers can clearly see the displaced  shape  stress distribution  reinforcement layout and force diagrams  of their supporting structure  All models use physical objects  including physical beams  physical slabs  automatic meshing  load  distributions  and support generation  STAAD foundation designs  the physical slabs rather than individual elements     For mat foundation designs  STAAD foundation utilizes a true  finite element design using the individual element stresses rather  than using column strips  STAAD foundation can be used in a  stand alone mode or can be used in conjunction with STAAD Pro  where the support reactions from the main model and associated  load cases are automatically brought in     Because STAAD foundation provides a total solution for your  foundation needs  a built in project management system enables  line and span of control  revision records and multi job  functionalities  This helps you reduce cost in assembling the  technical and managerial information for your foundation  Full  step by step c
77. Exchanger      Single Exchanger    Heat Exchanger Length  L        Length of the heat exchanger     Upper Exchanger Diameter  UD        Diameter of the upper exchanger in case of stacked exchanger     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Upper Exchanger Diameter  UD        Diameter of the upper exchanger in case of stacked exchanger  This  will be used if single exchanger is chosen     Height from Pier Top to Upper Exchanger  H        Height from the top of the pier to the center line of the upper  exchanger     Soil Depth  SD        Depth of soil     Height of Pier Top from Base  B        Height from the top of the pier to the base of the foundation     Spacing of Exchanger  S        Spacing of the central line of the exchanger in case of stacked  exchanger     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 29    5 3 2 Footing Geometry Page    Here you have to input the geometrical data relate to the footing     Pier to Pier Distance  Pier Width   Pier Length   Right Overhang  Left Overhang  Width   Width  Max   Thickness   Thickness  Max     Length  Max     Unit    Choose the length dimension unit     180    20    64    12    42    132    132    24    24    264    Pier to Pier Distance       Distance of the central lines of the pier     Pier Width    Width of the pier     Pier length    Breadth of the pier     Right Overha
78. JexBX dex de  B   1000 mm  d    865 mm    M   613 5 x 106 N mm  As   2067 97 mm  m    Asmin   0 0012 x B x D   1140mm    m    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes       Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 25            c   shear  121 8 force   KN   1228    i  d   20 bending  rf moment   kNm                       Comparison  Value Of Reference Result STAAD foundation Menara  Result in Percent  Max  Bending 603 201 KN m m 613 5 KN m m 1 68  Moment     Max  Bending 219 687 KN m m 223 KN m m 1 48  Moment     Area of  Steal 2014 835 mm  m 2067 97 mm  m 2 56  Required  Rase 227 KN m  226 67 KN m  Negligible  Pressure                      Table 6 5    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 26   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Load Combination Generation    Clicking on    Generate Load Combination    leaf under    Loads and  Factors    group will bring a load combination dialog  allowing you  to generate the load combination automatically     Loads  amp  Factors   5 Create New Load Case   5 Add a Column Reaction Load    gt  Add a Point Load  for Mat only    5 Add a Line Load  for Mat only     gt  Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only    5 Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only    Ss Add Member Load  for Mat only     amp  Add Uniform Load    gt  Add Concentrated Load    gt  Add Trapezoidal Load  E Safety Factor Table    gt  Create New Load Combination    Generate Load Combination       gt  Remove Load Case   
79. Job button  A new job is  created     After the job is input  the graphics display window looks like the  following figure     3 21    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 22   Section 3     Quick Tour      a   i  2 Job1 z ILoad Case 1    Start Page     Geometry     Detail Drawing Layout Drawing Calculation Sheet       When there are multiple jobs and load cases in a project  by  changing the job numbers and the load case numbers in the  respective combo boxes  we can change the display of supports and  loadings in the window  We may also change the job settings of the  job shown in the job combo box by clicking the    Edit Current Job     leaf under job setup group in Main Navigator pane     5 Ge Job Setup  L eate a NEW Jop      amp  Edit Current Job   5 Delete Job    tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 23    3 6 Entering Design Parameters    When you begin a new project  only the Project Info  Foundation  Plan  Loads and Factor and Job Setup groups will appear in the  Main Navigator pane  The first three groups allow you to specify  the physical model upon which the foundation design is to be  performed  A fourth group  Job Setup  allows you to create a new  job or edit an existing job  It is only when you create a New Job  a  set of constraints for the program to use in performing a foundation  design  that groups related to the current design process will  appear     Now  take a look at the Main Navigator pane  A new 
80. Note that the origin of the local coordinate system  coincides with the center node of the element    3  Principal stresses  SMAX  amp  SMIN   the maximum shear  stress  TMAX   the orientation of the principal plane          tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 13     ANGLE   the Von Mises stress  VONT  amp  VONB   and the  Tresca stress  TRESCAT  amp  TRESCAB  are also printed for  the top and bottom surfaces of the elements  The top and  the bottom surfaces are determined on the basis of the  direction of the local Z axis        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    2 14   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    2 6 Sign Convention of Element Forces    X    Bottom    Surface       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes       Section 2     Theoretical Basis    local z               Tension is on the local  top    Z surface                  M   is the Bending Moment on the local x face  the local x face is the face  perpendicular to the local x axis   Myis the Bending Moment on the local y face  the local y face is the face  perpendicular to the local y axis    local top dx     Z surface  f      local y       local x    STRESS CAUSED BY Mx          2 15    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    dx a       local x   __ local top  dy A   Z surface     2 16   Section 2     Theoretical Basis                                    local top    2 surface        local y    local x               
81. Now click on OK and the dialog box will be dismissed     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 90   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Report Setup x              tem   Header and Logo            Select Item liob1              Summary Table  job1                        Available Selected          Now click on Print Preview icon in toolbar to see print preview and  then click on Print button to print the summary table            Sotware Moerse t  gt  Awe  Jo Tee             Fit Isolated afs DasTime 22 Aug 2007 16 27    Summary Table  job1    No ofpiles   Footing Length   Footing Width Thickness   in   in   in           LA IL a 72 000 72 000 38 000    Summary Table  job1    iad ee kar isa as matin     8   18 00 in  8   18 00 in    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 91    46 241 Layout Drawing    After successful design Layout drawing will be automatically drawn  to scale  complete with a title block  Switch to Layout Drawing tab  to view the layout drawing        Click on Save Drawing As button to save the drawing in different  formats including DWG and DXF     Save Drawing As       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 92   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment  4 6 2 4 2 Detail Drawing    After successful design Detail drawing will be automatically drawn  complete with a title block  Switch to Detail Drawing tab t
82. RangaRakes    STAAD foundation    USER   S MANUAL    RangaRakes    Table of Contents    STAAD  foundation User   s Manual    Section 1 System Requirements  Installation and Start up    1 1  1 2  1 3  1 5    Introduction   Hardware Requirements  Installation   Running STAAD  foundation    Section 2 Theoretical Basis    2 1  2 2  2 3  2 4  2 5  2 6  2 7    Introduction to Finite Element Analysis  Element Load Specification  Theoretical Basis   Element Local Coordinate System  Output of Element Forces   Sign Convention of Element Forces  STAAD  foundation Program Theory    Section3 Quick Tour    3 1  3 2  3 3  3 4  3 5  3 6  3 7  3 8  3 9  3 10  3 11  3 12  3 13  3 14  3 15  3 16  3 17  3 18  3 19  3 20  3 21  3 22  3 23    Introduction   Starting a New Project   Entering Support Coordinates   Defining the Loads   Using Jobs to Specify Design Constraints  Entering Design Parameters   Performing an Isolated Footing Design   Importing Structural Geometry and Analysis Results from STAAD Pro  Creating a New Job for a Mat Foundation   Setting Up the Grid and Defining the Mat Boundary  Creating a Mesh   Specifying Slab Thickness   Defining Soil Properties   Analyzing the Slab   Slab Design   Pile Cap Example   Entering Pile Data   Entering Pile Cap Design Parameters   Performing Pile Cap Design and Viewing Results  Exporting Drawings to CAD   Creating Strip Footing Job   Strip Footing design parameters   Creating Octagonal Footing Job    1 1    1 2  1 4  1 5  1 10    tamilnavarasam co
83. STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Show Support Numbers    This option is used to display support numbers  Support numbers  will not be displayed if Show Supports option is switched off     Show Piles    This option is used to switch on off display of piles in graphics  area     Show Pile Numbers    This option is used to display pile numbers  Pile numbers will not  be displayed if Show Piles option is switched off     Show Load Arrows    This option is used to display load arrows  The color picker control  next to it allows user to select a suitable color to draw load arrows     Show Load Values    This option is used to display load values next to the load arrows   Show Physical Beams  This option is used to display physical beams if present in the  project  The color picker control next to it allows user to select a  suitable color to draw physical beams   Draw Line 3D diagram   Select this option to draw physical beam as a line or as a solid  surface  Beam property will be used to draw the rectangular beam    shape     Show Plates    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 239    This option is used to display plate elements if present in current  job  The color picker control next to it allows user to select a  suitable color to draw meshed plates     Draw 2D 3D Plates    This option gives user a choice to display plates as 2d surface ora  solid 3d diagram     Show Plate Numbers    This option is used to display plate number
84. Safety Factor Table   5 Create New Load Combination   5  Remove Load Case    A form under the load description area will appear allowing you to  create a new load case     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 12   Section 3     Quick Tour         T Descrinti  Load Title oad Case 1    man m      Copy Load  Load Case No Service  5 Self Weight Ultimate    Add Self Weight Yes       Enter the title    Load Case 1    in the Load Title field  The Load  Title allows you to give each load case a descriptive name to help  identify between load cases  Leave the Load Type set as Primary        Note  Three load types are available  Primary  Service  and  Ultimate  Primary loads can be further used to create  combination loads  Service loads are not factored and are used  for soil bearing pressure checks  Ultimate loads are factored  and are used for shear and reinforcement design        Add Load Assign To View    Assign Load            Load Description  Load Title Load Case 1  Load Type Prima     Copy Load  Load Case No None  5 Self Weight  Add Self Weigh lo    While creating a new load case  load items from an existing load  case can be copied  As we don   t have any defined load case yet we  leave that field as    None    and finally choose    No    for add self  weight field     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 13  Now click on the    Add Load    button to have the load case created     j i j   sx       Load Description T
85. Side View icon allows you to display a foundation as seen  from the left side  When the global Y axis is vertical  this is the  side elevation view  as seen looking towards the positive direction  of the X axis     View From Top    The View From Top icon allows you to display a foundation as seen  from the top looking down  When the global Y axis is vertical  this  is the plan view  as seen from the sky looking down     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 248    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    View From Bottom    The View From Bottom icon allows you to display a foundation as  seen from the bottom looking up towards the sky     Isometric    The Isometric icon allows you to display a foundation in an  isometric view  The angle that defines the isometric view is  generally X   30  Y   30  and Z   0     Rotate Up    The Rotate Up icon allows you to rotate the view of a structure  about the global X axis  in the direction indicated by the circular  arrow in the icon     Rotate Down    The Rotate Down icon allows you to rotate the view of a structure  about the global X axis  in the direction indicated by the circular  arrow in the icon     Rotate Left    The Rotate Left icon allows you to rotate the view of a structure  about the global Y axis  in the direction indicated by the circular  arrow in the icon     Rotate Right    The Rotate Right icon allows you to rotate the view of a structure  about the 
86. Tota  Area Out of  s of Total  Case Contact Area Contact Area   1  1034 478480  83 84121906   199 3758122   16 15878093  Di  1028 541729  83 36006411   205 3125633   16 63993588    To review plates stresses please click on the    Plate Stress    and     Plate Stress Summary    pages  Please note that the stress summary  page displays a maximum value 68 636 kip ft ft  Please note that all  plate stress values are based on plate local axis system     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 53                                                                  1    0 514779 0 948151  0 000000  0 000000   1 022040  4 121768   0 813953  1 4  0 514779  0 948151  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  1 022040  1121768   0813053  1 4  0 514779  0 948151  0 000000  0 000000 10 000000  1 022040  1 121768   0 813953  1 4 jo s14779  0 948151  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  1 022040  1 121768 _  0 813953  1 4  0 514779  0 948151  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  1 022040  1 121768   0813053  1 4 jo s14779  0 948151  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  1 022040 _  1 121768 _  0 813953  1182 id  2 509669   41 619241  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  68 636673   24623075 0 748266  1237 4 12 589893  0 984670  0 000000 10 000000  0 000000  30 788416     0 870419   1 726139  107 ji  4 902564   1 069600  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  65 682480  33 505085  0 631877   774 4  0 748960  4 190650  0 000000 10 000000 10 000000   0 676226   26 271280   2 859145  211 id leetesot   5 318206  0 000000  0 000
87. a      Plant Foundation    Tutorial    T Open Existing Project  Examples                                   1s M    4       This will crate the GUI for plant setup  In the left side of the  window there will be a tree control in the    Main Navigator    pane  as the following figure shows     Main Navigator a x  4   STAAD foundation Member  4  23 Project Info   35 General Information    gt  Review History   5 Create New Vessel Foundation   5 Create New Heat Exchanger Foundation    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 4   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Here you will see two leafs for    Vertical Vessel Foundation    and     Heat Exchanger Foundation     Click on one which you want to  use  You can create many vessels as well as heat exchangers as you         wish  The created jobs will be listed in the tree view as follows     Main Navigator ax  4   STAAD foundation Member  4  23 Project Info    gt  General Information   3 Review History   5 Create New Vessel Foundation   5 Create New Heat Exchanger Foundation  4  5 Edit Yessel Footing  4  57 Vertical Vessel Footing  1    gt  Edit    gt  Delete   5 Design  4  S7 Edit Heat Exchanger Footing  4  Sp Heat Exchanger Footing   1    gt  Edit    gt  Delete    gt  Design    Later you can edit or delete any of them just clicking on    Edit     amp      Delete    in the tree leaf  And on clicking on    Design    it will  design the corresponding foundation     
88. a line on slab      By specifying coordinates Unit    ft      Starting  0 Starting2  0  EndingX  100 EndingZ  0    Specify discrete design points    Division along longitudinal axis   60  Division along transverse axis  60  Select load type    Use all load cases v      A Generate moment envelope       Select    Use all load cases    from    Select load type    drop down list  and click on the    Generate Moment Envelope    button to generate    moment envelope     Program will generate a finite number of discrete points which in  turn will be used as design points  The design grid appears in the  graphics window like the following figure        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 58   Section 3     Quick Tour    The next step is to set design parameters and design slab  Please  click on the    Design Parameters    leaf under    Mat slab design  options    in main navigator pane        Mat slab design options  G Analyze    Output View Options   S5 Moment envelope generation  E Reinforcement Zoning   5 Cut slab by a line    amp  Calculation sheet    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 3     Quick Tour    A form with the design parameters will appear in the Data Area  pane  For this example we will use all default values  Click on the     Design    button to design the slab     Design Parameters    Grades       Fy          Fe       Covers       Top cover             Bottom cover       Rebar Size  Min  bar size    Max  b
89. against sliding     Factor of Safety    Factor Safety against sliding and overturning     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 47  5 3 8 Finish and Design    Now click on    Finish     You will see a Vessel job is added to the  tree view in the left side    Main Navigator    pane  Now click on     Design     The design progress can be seen in the    Output Window     situated below  And a detailed calculation sheet will come in the     Calculation Sheet    tab     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com         Indian Verification Problems    Section 6       This section includes discussion on the following topics     e Indian Verification Problem 1  e Indian Verification Problem 2  e Indian Verification Problem 3  e Indian Verification Problem 4  e Indian Verification Problem 5    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 2   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    6 1 Indian Verification Problem 1    Reference     Reinforced Concrete    by A K  Jain  Page 539  Example 18 2   Problem    Design an isolated footing with the given data  Load Fy   1000 KN   fc   15 MPa  fy   415 MPa  Column Dimension   400 mm X 400  mm  Bearing Capacity of Soil   100 KN m     and Load Factor   1 5           3500mm             3500 mm       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 3    Solution          1000   5  Approximate area of footing req
90. al  40 Dia   10  Uplift   40 Edge 18  Vertical  60 Pile in Pilecap  3           Rectangular    Circular    Number of Rows  4    Row Spacing 136 i  Number of Columns  4 7  Column Spacing   36         Create Pile Arrangement             Select Current Arangement    8 Show Pile Reaction      Row Spacing    Column Spacing       tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 81    The following parametric pile arrangement data and commands are  available     e Support for Pile Arrangement  e Pile Capacity   e Pile Diameter   e Spacing   e Edge Distance   e Pile Arrangement Type  Rectangular or Circular   e Number of Rows   e Row spacing   e Number of Columns   e Column spacing   e Create Pile Arrangement   e Select Current Arrangement   e Show Pile Reaction   e Row Spacing   e Column Spacing    Support for Pile Arrangement    The Support for Pile Arrangement drop down list box allows you to  select a support from the current job for which you would like to  input pile arrangement     Pile Capacity    The Pile Capacity group box allows you to input the forces that a  pile is meant to bear     Unit  The Unit drop down list box allows you to select the force unit  used for Pile Capacity and length unit used for spacing  diameter     edge distance etc      Pile Capacity    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 82   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Lateral    The Lateral fiel
91. alculations are also provided in XML form  where    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up   1 3    possible  to verify each and every output provided by the program   These verification checks can be easily shared with your clients for  approval     We hope you enjoy your experience with STAAD  foundation  If  you have any questions or problems with the program  please visit  our product page at http   www bentley com Staad foundation or  email us at support  bentley com           RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    1 4   Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up    1 2 Hardware Requirements    The following requirements are suggested minimums  Systems with  increased capacity provide enhanced performance     e PC with Intel Pentium   AMD processor    e Graphics card and monitor with 1024x768 resolution  256  color display  16 bit high color recommended     e 128 MB RAM or higher    e Windows 98  NT 4 0 or higher operating system  Windows  2000 XP Preferred  Running it on Windows 95 systems is  not recommended  as performance may be degraded    e Sufficient free space on the hard disk to hold the program  and data files  The disk space requirement will vary  depending on the modules you are installing  A typical  minimum is 500MB free space        Note  Additional RAM  disk space  and video memory will  enhance the performance of STAAD foundation  The 
92. an control the location of    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 18   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    the grid origin with respect to the global coordinate system  You  can also specify the number of grid lines  and the spacing between  lines  The grid lines may be spaced equally apart  or you can    specify the spacing of each individual grid line        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 19    Linear    The Linear Grid form allows you to create a linear grid   Grid Origin    The Grid Origin group box allows you to specify the origin of the  grid     Unit  The Unit field allows you to select the current length unit of the    grid system  You can change the unit by clicking on that field and  selecting desired unit from the drop down list     Origin X    The Origin X field allows you to specify the X coordinate of the  grid origin     Origin Y    The Origin Y field allows you to specify the Y coordinate of the  grid origin     Origin Z    The Origin Z field allows you to specify the Z coordinate of the  grid origin     Spacing  The Spacing group box allows you to specify the spacing between    grid lines  The unit measurement used is specified in the unit field  above in the Grid Origin group box     Spacing X    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 20   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    The Spaci
93. angaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 244   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Help Toolbar       The Help Toolbar allows you to obtain information about  STAAD  foundation     The Help Toolbar contains the following toolbar icon     e About    About    The About icon opens a dialog box containing information on the  version of STAAD  foundation you re currently running  The  information in the dialog box includes product name  release  number and build number  In addition  the physical address  web  address and phone numbers for the Research Engineers  International is displayed     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 245    bout StaadFoundation          El StaadFoundation Version 4 0    Build  1 0 aR    Copyright    2007 Research Engineers International    Research Engineers International Headquarters       Bentley Solutions Center     22700 Savi Ranch Pkwy       Yorba Linda  CA 92887 4608   Phone   714  974 2500   Fax   14  974 4771   e mail support bentley com   web  http   www  bentley com  Staad  foundation    Research Engineers  Intl   A Bentley Solutions Center  http   www  bentley com     http   www bentley com Staad foundation    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 246   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 10 3    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Rotate Toolbar       View From Top Rotate Down  Right Side View 
94. anual  Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    ut line    gn report along a  lt        Select Graph Type  O Moment Envelope    Reqd  Reinforcement Area   O Moment Envelope   Wood and Armer    Set Design Parameters    C Design for Ultimate load type only                           130 54       130 54  Top  113                130 54  Top          tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 6 6 5    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Calculation sheet       Click on calculation sheet to review design steps  analysis results  and load values     4 161       Panel  Name        kip in2     kip in2     Max  Spacing   Spacing     in     Wood and  Armer  Moment       Boundary                               60 000 4 000                                                 Top of Mat Longitudinal Direction    DESIGN OUTPUT       Zone                                                               Governing Moment Mgoy    11 268 kip in   For F    4 0 B  0 85  Pmin    0 0018  Pmax   0 75 0 85 x BxFe TEOT  T   0 021  Effective Depth deff    10 813 in   Steel Percentage  P     Preqd    mf   g E  1 Lenn _ 0008  fy m  y  Where ME VA  n  ET    0 107 kipsin2                       tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 162   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 7 Combined Footing    In this job setup you can create a combined footing with two  supports as well as a strip footing with more than two supports     RangaRakes tamilnav
95. ar size    Rebar Spacing       Max  spacing          Min  spacing                C Consider Wood and Armer moments    Result summary Details report       The program will perform the slab design  When the design  Operation is completed  a message box will appear     STAAD foundation XI    A Design performed successfully       The next step is to create reinforcing zones  Click on the     Reinforcement Zoning    leaf under    Mat slab design options    in    main navigator pane     3 59    tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  3 60   Section 3     Quick Tour    5 Mat slab design options   Gy Analyze    Output View Options  E Moment envelope generation   5  Design Parameters        Reinforcement Zoning  Cut slab by a line   5 Calculation sheet    A form will appear in data area pane which will look like following        Reinforcement Zoning      Slab Detailing       Choose Slab Face     Longitudinal Top           v  Preferred Zone Reinforcement Count    3    Create Bock      Zore report   Steel Detailing  View Option       Al    Show    Grid Lines       Zone Editing    Lock Higher Zone  Current Zone     TE zoe 50 v    X Select Nodes    Reset Zones                   By default  slab face is set as    Longitudinal Top     Use    preferred  zone reinforcement count    as 3  Now click on    Create Zone     button  The program will plot colored dots on each design point    based on required reinforcement  We can call this reinforcement  contour plot     RangaRa
96. arasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 163  4 7 1 Creating Combined Footing Job    Create linear supports from    Column Position    as follows and add  loads as described earlier        Now go to    Create New Job     Give a suitable job name  Choose     Job Type    as    Combined     Select and move the load from     Available Load Case    list to    Selected Load Case    list  Then click  on    Create Job    button  You will see some new control came at the  bottom of the    Job Info    data input pane to create a combined  footing with selected supports     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    4 164   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    MAA    Job Info      combi   Combined  Design Code US  Default Unit Type English                Available Load Cases      O    Selected Load Cases      7    Strip Footing        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 165  4 7 2 Creating the Combined Footing    Now select the support in the    Geometry    view using the mouse  dragging        Create from Selected Nodes       Now click on the button    Create from Selected Nodes    which will  show a tree view with the footing included with support     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 166   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Strip Footing   Strip footing setup     Footing C1  Support 1  Support
97. as been saved to a file  clicking on the Save menu  command again will simply save any updates made to the project to  the file specified when you first saved the project     Save As    The Save As menu command opens the save as file dialog box and  allows you to save the active project to a file  To save a project   navigate to the directory in which you want to save the project  type  in a file name for the project and then click on Save     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 192   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    STAAD  foundation File saving    Save in   S Examples KE  e e a             B Verification    E  ex08 afs   aj ex08_slabDesign0 afs   ea  ex08iso afs    ex08pile iso afs                      File name   exOBpile iso afs    Cancel    Save as type    STAAD foundation Files  afs  v         Print    The Print menu command opens a standard Windows print dialog  box and allows you to print the active project report     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 193    Te lx    m Printer    Name  HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si MX PS Properties       Status  Ready   Type  HP LaserJet 5Si 5Si Mx PS   Where  IP 649519441    Comment  J Print to file                r Print range Copies    All Number of copies  1      C Pages from  1 to 7 Collet  Collate     Selection nee pi      Cancel                     Print Preview    The Print Preview menu command opens a new window allowi
98. ated at a  min  distance d 2 from the face of a corner pile or  faces of a pile group along the edge of the footing   The critical plane is assumed to be positioned along  a straight and curved line  so that the total section  length is minimized    At the distance d 2 around the pedestal  The  section comprises four straight line segments   parallel to corresponding sides of the column    At the distance d 2 around a pile     The design is performed for the total pile reaction force    acting within the perimeter of the critical section  in  accordance with Sections 11 12 2 through 11 12 6     tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 23    Flexure is checked for critical planes located at both faces  of the pedestal  The bending moment is calculated as an  aggregate of moments due to pile reactions on one side of  the plane     Determination of an individual pile contribution to the  forces at a critical section is based on whether the pile is  outside this section  full reaction value assumed   inside the  section  reaction ignored   or at an intermediate location   partial reaction assumed   as per Section 15 5 4     3  Mat  Raft Foundation     Analysis and design of mats is based on finite element  method  FEM  coupled with slab on elastic subgrade  principles  First  the user creates a finite element model of  the proposed mat foundation  This may be accomplished in  one of two ways     Importing a STAAD file of the superstructure  thus  providing refere
99. ation Graphical Environment   4 15  4 4 2 The Foundation Plan Page      Foundation Plan    gt  Linear Grid Setup   5 Radial Grid Setup     Column Position   5 Column Dimension    The Foundation Plan page allows you to specify basic information  on support  such as Column Positions  Column Dimension  It also  allows creating a grid to be used for defining column position  pile  position  mat boundary etc     The Foundation Plan page contains the following sub pages   e Linear Grid Setup  e   Radial Grid Setup    e Column Positions  e Column Dimensions    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 16   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment  4 4 2 1 Grid Setup     4 Foundation Plan  Radial Grid Setup     gt  Column Position   687 Column Dimension    Clicking on the Linear Grid Setup leaf opens a form in the Data  Area pane that allows you to define a linear grid which will be  displayed in the Graphics Window for you to create foundation  geometry on     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 17             Spacing x  Spacing Z       Lines left to origin  Lines right to ongin  Lines top of origin  Lines bottom of ongin                     Grid Direction  Show Grid  Save As Default                            You may use the form to draw a grid in the Graphics Window  The  grid allows you to specify your foundation geometry by snapping to  the intersections of the grid lines  You c
100. ation will be  application specific i e  they are independent of file saving     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    6 28   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Following figure shows the load combination page after clicking  generate load combination button          Load Combination Input    STAAD  foundation Load Combination        Load Description Tree   Load Case 1  Dead   E Load Case 2  Seismic    9 Load Comb 101   1 000 x DL                              Dead x 1 000  Allowable Load Combination    Gi Load Comb 102   1 000 x DL 0 700 X EL  i    Dead x 1 000  si IL Seismic x 0 700  ooo   Load Comb 103   1 000 x DL 0 525 X EL    Dead x 1 000              Seismic X 0 525  Load Comb 104   0 600 x DL   amp  Dead x 0 600            Generate Load Combination        Primary  Dead          None    Add Self Weight Yes                               Generate Load Combination       Generate Load Combination Button    The first column indicates the index of the load combination  The  second column has a check  Check on the check boxes of the  combination which you want to use  The cell with zero values  appears in gray color where as with values other than zero it  appears in sky color  On clicking the Generate Load Combination  Button as shown in the above figure  the load combination for the  added load cases will be generated     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 29    Update Table    Initiall
101. avarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 96   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    This thickness will be used during the slab FEA analysis  This  parameter can have its own unit  This property is especially useful  if we you want to simulate pedestal etc  for stiffness analysis but  use the actual slab thickness for design  This can also be used to  input uncracked thickness for analysis     Slab design thickness    This thickness will be used during slab design  This parameter can  have its own unit  This property is especially useful if we you want  to simulate pedestal etc  for stiffness analysis but use the actual  slab thickness for design  This can also be used to input cracked  thickness for slab design     Subgrade modulus    Subgrade modulus is a soil property available from geotechnical  report  Program uses this value to calculate spring stiffness under  each support node by multiplying this value with the nodal tributary  area     Beam sectional property    This property will be used to define cross sectional property of the  physical beams added to mat foundation  Current version of the  program can only have rectangular property     Pile spring values    If the mat is supported by piles you need to create pile layout by  adding piles to mat foundation  Program uses pile as spring support  for analysis  So  program needs to know spring constant for those  pile supports  Ky represents vertical spring constant  K
102. be generated for the  strip footing in the    Strip Footing Graph    pane as shown below        tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 91          Ia             Select strip footing index   Footing C1     Selectload case   1  1 4DL   1 7LL  w                205 70  191 65    163 55  135 44  107 34  79 23  65 18  51 13  23 02   5 08   33 18   61 29   75 34   89 39   299 455  121 335   117 50   145 60   0 00 35 14 7027 105 41 14054 175 68 210 82 245 95 28109 316 22 351 36 386 50  421   439 20   Length  in      66 545 171 419     Shear Force  kip        8053 56   959 45    6571 23  5583 00  4594 78  3606 55  3112 44  2618 33  1630 10    641 88     184 848 6711 302     Bending Moment  kip in        62 848  3582 707   3311 02     0 00 3514 7027 10541 14054 17568 21082 24595 28109 31622 35136 386 50  421   439 20  Length  in  8    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    3 92   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 23    Creating Octagonal Footing Job    Now let us create a new job inside this same project to illustrate the  process for designing an octagonal footing     Click on the    Create a new Job    leaf under    Job Setup    group in  main navigator pane  The Create a New Job form will open in data  area pane  Enter job name as    Oct1     Choose Job type as     Octagonal    and design code as US  Select support node    5    in  main view  Support assignment type will be automatically switched  to    Assign to selected suppo
103. beam table      3 Pile Layout    Mesh generation        4 Add meshing regions    amp  Using polyline      6 Add a circular region   Gy Regular polygon   3 Meshing setup  H  Analysis properties  H 5 Mat slab design options    The following form opens up in data area pane  Set unit as    inch     and input X1 Z1 as   30  30   Then enter Length as 515 inch and  Width as 345 inch  Keep Y level as 0 0 as our support columns have  same Y level     Now  click on    Add Region    button to create the Mat boundary     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 36   Section 3     Quick Tour    Data Input Pane 00000         Rectangular Boundary    Define Rectangular Region    Unit    in v  X coordinate at Top left corner   30  Z coordinate at Top left corner   30  Length   515  X1  Z1   Width   345   Y Level   B Eng           Add Region    This action will create the boundary in the graphics display window  of view pane     Width    a       If your screen shows a grid  you may want to switch it off by  clicking on Linear Grid Setup leaf under Foundation Plan group in    Main Navigator pane     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 37       The following form will open in data area pane  Choose Show Grid  as    No    to switch off the grid     Spacing X  Spacing Z       Lines left to ongin  Lines nght to origin  Lines top of origin  Lines bottom of origin                            Now it would be a good idea to save your model  s
104. ber of  piles  layout  The user may select any other layout guantity  if desired  however  In addition  changing the coordinates  of individual piles may modify the selected pile layout   Alternatively  the user may input the entire configuration  by hand     The layout recommended by the program is guaranteed to  satisfy the load capacity ratio for all piles  Should the user   modified or manually input layouts result in pile  overstressing  the program will flag this deficiency in the  design output     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    2 22   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    Step 2   Design of Pile Cap    Proportioning of the pile cap involves satisfying the shear     one and two way  and bending requirements at applicable  critical sections  in accordance with Chapter 15 of ACI    318 02     One way shear is checked in two areas     ii     At outer piles  with the critical section located at a  min  distance d from the face of a corner pile or  faces of a pile group along the edge of the footing   At the distance d from two orthogonal faces of the  pedestal     The critical shear plane is assumed along a shortest straight  line connecting free edges of the footing  The design is then    performed for the total pile reaction force on one side of  the shear plane  in accordance with Sections 11 1 through    11 5     Two way shear is checked in three areas     ii     iii     At outer piles  with the critical section loc
105. ble for the foundation design  When the Import  command is executed  an import dialog box will appear     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes          Look in    Bus      4 Ee ta    2 element_trap_jt_tri std  2  EXAMPOS STD BE     Ex01CAST STD  2  EXAMP06 STD Ina   S  EXAMPO1 STD    EXAMPO7 STD EI   3  ExamPo2 STD DENTEN B      ExaMPO3 STD      EXAMPO9 STD  ne   3  EXAMPO4 STD    EXAMP10 STD Im       Filename    EXAMPO8 STD    Files oftype   STAAD ProFies std  x    To import a STAAD Pro file  navigate to the directory in which the  file is located and then select the file and click on Open  Another  dialog box will appear listing all the available load cases in the  STAAD Pro file  You may select any or all of the load cases by  toggling on the corresponding check box  and then clicking on the  Import button  As STAAD Pro does not have the definition for  serviceability and ultimate load type user should assign right load  type attribute to each load case here  By default program defines all  load cases as primary load types     You can import either support coordinates or a slab already  analyzed in STAAD Pro to design in STAAD foundation  To import  support coordinates simply click on import button and it will import  all support positions along with support reactions for all selected  load cases     To import an analyzed slab select Import Plates option and then  enter Y level of the slab position  Program can only import a slab  defined in XZ plane  Now select des
106. bo box  It will also show the corresponding City   Latitude and Longitude for that Zip Code    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   5 17    Sesimic Ground Motion Values         Select using Zip Code O Enter Value Manually    Select Zip   onso1  se         City   p  Site Class  4 v  Latitude    Longitude    m ortance Factor  I  1 00 v     lt  Previous       Enter Value Manually       Choose    Enter Value Manually    to enter the value of S7 and Ss  with your own choice     Site Class    Value of Fa  amp  Fv depends on choice of Site Class  But you can use  your own value for them on choosing Site Class as    F        Response Modification Factor  R        The default value for this field is 2 or 3  But the input control for  this value is not a read only combo box  so use can enter your own  desired value     Occupancy Importance Factor  1        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  5 18   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    The default value for this field is 1  1 25 and 1 5  But the input  control for this value is not a read only combo box  so use can enter  your own desired value     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   5 19  5 2 6 Load Combination Page    Two types of load combinations are used here  They are    Allowable  Load Combination    and    Ultimate Load Combination     You can  create any number of load c
107. ck on    Create Job    button to create a new combined  footing job     Job Name    lob Type       Design Code  Default Unit Type          Support    Assignment  Listed Supports                Please note that there are some new controls in the job creation  page which will be used to setup and assign strip footing     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 86   Section 3     Quick Tour    Loading       Available Load Cases              S  gt  S    Selected Load Cases    1  Loadi             Create Job    Strip Footing           a Create from Selected Node    _ Delete a    Now  with mouse select node 2 and 3 in view pane  Nodes will be  shown as selected as shown below     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 87       Click on the    Create from Selected Node    button  A tree view  showing the support assignment will appear     Strip Footing     Strip footing setup     Footing C1  Support 2  Support 3    8 Create from Selected Node  aA Delete Q Delete All          Note the view pane also shows the combined footing        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual  3 88   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 22 Strip Footing design parameters    Now we need to input suitable design parameters  The input for     Concrete  amp  Rebar     amp     Cover  amp  Soil    are as same as isolated  footing  We will use default values for those two sections of design  parameters as shown below              
108. ckness is not reguired if the fundamental period  is entered manually  The other inputs are reguired for calculation of  seismic load     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 11    Concentrated Mass       These are the lumped masses attached to the vessel such as ladder   platform etc     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    5 12  Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  5 2 4 Wind Load Generation Page    Inputs for wind load can be given in two ways  You can directly  input the shear force  amp  moment values with choosing the proper  unit or you can use the software to calculate those values using  ASCE 7 2005     To input the load directly choose    User defined Wind Load    radio  button in the wind load page as below and give the value of shear  force with choosing units from the combo box right to it               User defined Wind Load  Shear Value fo kip x   Moment Value 0 kip in v  O Calculated Wind Load   M  DESIGN WIND PRESSURE  P  0 00256   Kd   Kz   Kt   v2 I FG    CF  psf   Wind Speed  0 mph  Kd  0 Table 6 6  Kz for   Exp 6 Case 1    1  8 Table 6 1          Otherwise choose    Calculated Wind Load    radio button which will  activate the required input fields as shown below  All the inputs are  described with mentioning the section and table number of the  code     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    5 13                      Section 4     STAAD fo
109. color where as with values other than zero it  appears in sky color     Update Table    Initially the page shows all the load combination saved in the INI  file  You can add new load combination simply by adding factors in  the last row  Check on the check box in the second row to use the  load combination  If you save a file with those load combination  then the load combination will be only saved to that file but not in    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   5 43    INI file  To save the load combination in the INI file you need to  click on    Update Table     You can also manually change the INI  file     Delete  To delete a load combination  select a row and then click on     Delete    to delete any particular load combination from the list     But to delete any combination from the INI file you need to click  on    Update Table    after clicking on    Delete        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 44   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    5 3 7 Design Parameter Page    Design parameter is grouped under three categories  They are  Concrete and Rebar  Cover and Soil and Sliding and Overturning     Density Unit   Ibjft3 v Length Unit  in     Stress Unit   ksi v    Concrete and Rebar Cover and Soil   Concrete Unit Weight  150 Pedestal Clear Cover  2  Fe  4 Footing Bottom Cover  2   Fy  60 Soil Unit Weight   125  Max Bar Spacing  18 Soil Bearing Capacity      M
110. creen at a time  Once you are in two page mode  the text on  the button will change to    One Page     If you click on the button  again  one page will be displayed on the screen at a time and the  text on the button will change back to    Two Page        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 218    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Zoom In    The Zoom In button allows you to zoom in closer on a page of a  report  After you click on the Zoom In button  your mouse cursor  will change to a magnifying glass  You may then zoom in ona  portion of a report by clicking on the region you want to zoom in  on  Once you have zoomed in  the Zoom In button will become  grayed out  You may return to the original viewing distance by  clicking on the Zoom Out button     Zoom Out   The Zoom Out button allows you to zoom back out after zooming in  on a page of a report  The Zoom Out button is only active after  zooming in on a page of a report     Close    The Close button removes the print preview window     Print    The Print icon opens a standard Windows print dialog box and  allows you to print the active project report     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 219       f Selection po po I Talia       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 220   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Import Toolbar    I sh  
111. ction 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 4 3 7    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Add Uniform Load  member load     Clicking on the Add Uniform Load leaf opens a form in data area  pane that allows you to create a uniform load on physical beams           Start Distance  d1  0 000000  End Distance  d2  0 000000  Direction    Siisci Hye local divscticns Iron es Conuben an 5 5       To create a uniform beam Load  first select the Load and Length  Units to use for the load  Next  input the load value with proper  sign  Please note  a positive Y value represents load acting upward   Now  select the Direction  Local X  Local Y  Local Z  Global X   Global Y  or Global Z  in which the load will act upon  If this a  partial load input start and end distance  Please note  start and end  distance are here in local coordinates  If start and end distance are  kept as 0 0 the load will be applied on entire beam  Finally  click  on Add Load to accept the load     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 43  4 4 3 8  Add Concentrated Load  member load     Clicking on the Add Concentrated Load leaf opens a form in data  area pane that allows you to create a concentrated load on physical  beams       Load    Unit kip  Unit p      Position  Unit n       her Ing Ser amos ea ae           Insert ve  value if the load is vertically downw  F                To create concentrated load acting on a beam  first select the Load  and Length U
112. d  A v    Combination Type    Available Primary Load Cases   1   Load Case 1  2  Live Load    Factor      1       TS      a    Ca  Load Combination Definition     Load Case        Factor      Add Load Combination    The load case number is automatically incremented with each new  load combination  Enter a description for the new combined load  such as    Dead Load   Live Load        The Load Combinations form will lists all defined Primary Load  Cases for the foundation in the list box on the top  The Factor box  on the right indicates the factor with which the selected Primary  Load Cases are to be multiplied     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 48   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    To include a Primary Load Case  first select the load case from the  list  Enter the multiplication factor in the Factor field  Click the      button to include the Primary Load Case in the Load  Combinations specification  Continue for all primary load cases to      4  be combined  Use the   button to include all Primary Load  Cases  which will be multiplied by the specified factor  To remove  a Primary Load Case from the Load Combinations  select the load    case in the grid on the bottom and click the    button  To remove  a    all Primary Load Cases  click on the button  A    Click Add Load Combination button to create the load  combination     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment
113. d  Then input  the elevation at which the load is applied in the Y Pos field  Next   input the number of pie shaped wedges to use in simulating the  circular boundary in the No  of Divisions Field  Finally  click on  Add Load button to accept the load     Note  The Y Position must correspond to the elevation of the  foundation supports        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 40   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 4 3 6 Add a Line Load  for Mat only     Clicking on the Add a Line Load leaf opens a form in data pane  area that allows you to create a Line Load  Line Loads are  distributed linear load and only applicable to mat foundations              Value of the uniformly distributed line load  Enter a  ve value if the  load is vertically downward      x1 21   x2 22     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 41    To create a Line Load  first select the Dimension and Force Units  to use for the load  Then input the magnitude of the load in the  Force field  Next  input the X and Z coordinates of the start and  end points of the line in the Starting X  Starting Z  Ending X   Ending Z fields  Then input the elevation at which the load is  applied in the Y Pos field  Finally  click on Add Load button to  include the load     Note  The Y Position must correspond to the elevation of the  foundation supports     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 42   Se
114. d allows you to specify the lateral force a pile is  meant to bear     Vertical    The Vertical field allows you to specify the vertical force a pile is  meant to bear     Uplift    The Uplift field allows you to specify the uplifting force a pile is  meant to bear     Pile Diameter  The Pile Dia  field allows you to specify the diameter of a pile   Spacing  The Spacing field allows you to specify the spacing between piles   Edge Distance    The Edge Distance field allows you to specify the distance between  the edges of a pile     Arrangement Type    Pile arrangement can be either rectangular or circular  Pile cap  having circular arrangement will be design as octagonal pile cap     Rectangular Arrangement    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 83    Rectangular arrangement needs following inputs    e Number of Rows   e Number of Columns  e Row Spacing   e Column Spacing    By default program will create symmetric pile arrangement from the  above input but user can change the default setup by editing the  table below  Both row and column grid lines can be adjusted by  selecting appropriate radio button       Row Spacing    Column Spacing       Circular Arrangement  Circular arrangement needs following inputs    e Number of Piles     Total number of piles  e Number of Layers     Number of concentric circles  e Pile Spacing     minimum spacing between piles  e Use Center Pile     Add a pile at center of pile arrangement  Number of Pil
115. d allows you to specify the uplifting force a pile is    meant to bear     Pile Diameter    The Pile Dia  field allows you to specify the diameter of a pile   User can choose appropriate unit from the drop down list at right     Spacing    The Spacing field allows you to specify the spacing between piles   User can choose appropriate unit from the drop down list at right     Edge Distance    The Edge Distance field allows you to specify the distance between  the edges of a pile  User can choose appropriate unit from the drop  down list at right     Show Loading On Support    The Show Loading on Support button opens a table displaying the  total loading on the support for each load case selected under  Support for Pile Arrangement     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 77    E Load Table for Support No  1       2 6995 49674  47  2461 5097 5 5 542748928  450  1890258 1730  1803131     8 757791996  115 2790145 4 845952033   416 8740539   339 7787170        Pile Arrangement Type    The Pile Arrangement Type group box allows you to input the  coordinates for a pile arrangement or have STAAD foundation  calculate a pile arrangement automatically     Auto Arrangement    The Auto Arrangement radio option allows you to have  STAAD foundation calculate the pile arrangement  In order to  have STAAD foundation calculate the pile arrangement  select Auto  Arrangement and click on the Calculate button  A window will  appear displaying all possibl
116. d as many piles as needed  Whenever a new  pile is created program will automatically create default spring  values for that pile  Newly created pile will be displayed in  graphics view                                                                                            RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 100   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 6 3 3 2    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    Rectangular Pile Arrangement Wizard   Parametric     This is a parametric wizard like input to create rectangular pile  layout  Generated pile coordinates will be in local coordinate  system where first pile is at 0 0 0 position  You need to move pile  group to the right location by inputting Origin X  Origin Y and  Origin Z     The following commands and options are available to generate pile  layout     Unit   Length Unit for row and column spacing   Number of Rows   Specify number of rows in layout grid  Number of Columns   Specify number of columns in layout grid  Row Spacing     Spacing between rows   Column Spacing     Spacing between columns    By default program will create symmetric pile arrangement from the  above input but user can change the default setup by editing the  table below  Both row and column grid lines can be adjusted by  selecting appropriate radio button     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 101    Pile arrangement parametric    Unit    Number of rows   Number of columns  
117. d rebar     Fy  Allowable steel stress   Fc  crushing concrete strength   Top Cover  Cover for slab top reinforcement  Bottom Cover  Cover for slab bottom reinforcement    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 149    Min  bar size  Minimum rebar size to be used  Max  bar size  Maximum rebar size to be used  Max  spacing  Maximum rebar spacing  Min  spacing  Minimum rebar spacing    Consider Wood and Armer moments  Use this option to consider Mxy moment to design the slab  This is  a method published by Wood and Armer where Mxy moment is  transformed to Mx and My moment     Design    Click on this button to design the slab  When the design operation  is completed  a message box will appear     STAAD foundation x      A Design performed successfully       Result summary    Clicking on this button will open a table which will show maximum  reinforcement requirement condition for all slab faces and  direction  The table shows four rows for longitudinal top   longitudinal bottom  transverse top and transverse bottom  reinforcement requirement     Details report    Clicking on this button will open a dialog box which will have two  tabs  One is for moment design and other one for punching shear  check  It lists all the grid points created to design the slab  It shows  X Y Z coordinates for each point  moment for that face and  direction and the corresponding reinforcement requirements     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation  
118. dation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Pedestal Clear Cover       Clear cover to be used for the pedestal     Footing Clear Cover       Clear cover to be used for the footing     Unit Weight of Soil       Unit weight of soil under consideration     Soil Bearing Capacity       Allowable bearing capacity of soil     Depth of Soil above footing       Soil depth above footing     Surcharge for loading       Loading surcharge of the footing   Set as Default    This is explained in the earlier page     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 173  4 7 3 3 Footing Geometry    These are the geometrical parameter used for design     Footing Geometry                                              FI   n  Em  L   a  i i Ha    pa E a  a    Choose the way of design from here  You can use the software for  an optimizing design procedure or you can check for a fixed  dimension    For the first case choose    Calculate Dimension    and for the latter  use    Set Dimension        Design Type    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 174   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Fixed Left over hang       Choose    Yes    or    No    respectively for setting the dimension as  fixed during check or optimize it     Fixed Right over hang       Choose    Yes    or    No    respectively for setting the dimension fixed  during check or optimize it    
119. de  you will need to use  the proper server name and activation key  In case of Bentley hosted server  both server name and activation key is provided by Bentley  For deployed   local  SELECT server installations activation key is provided by Bentley and  server name is the name of your local SELECT server  You may also choose  to configure these information later     A trial license is installed with software  which allows you to run  STAAD foundation for a period of up to 15 days  In case you did not enter the  server name and activation key during installation  you must configure the  server information using the Bentley SELECT XM License Tool within 15  days  The process is described under the heading     b  Adding the Bentley  SELECT Server activation code    of this document    tamilnavarasam com    Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up   1 9         fe  STAAD  foundation 4   InstallShield Wizard    Customer Information    Please enter your information   User Name     Organization     Bentley Systems    Install this application for        Anyone who uses this computer  all users   O only for me   Apurba Tribedi        Next screen allows user to input User Name and Organization and    the option to choose whether program will be installed for current  user or all users         i STAAD  foundation 4   InstallShield Wizard RI          Ready to Install the Program    The wizard is ready to begin installation     Click Install to begin the installation
120. divided into three simple steps  1  Moment envelope generation  2  Design slab  3  Create reinforcing zones and detailing   The Slab Design page contains the following sub pages    e FEM Slab Design    e Slab Detailing  e Section Design Along a Line    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 145  4 6 6 1 Moment Envelope Generation      Mat slab design options   5 Analyze   5 Output View Options   5 Design Parameters    amp  Reinforcement Zoning    amp  Cut slab by a line   9 Calculation sheet    Clicking on the Moment Envelope Generation opens a form in data  area pane which allows user to choose longitudinal reinforcement  directions and generate moment envelope  Please note  longitudinal  axis is just a vector direction     Mat slab is a physical entity in STAAD  foundation  so to design the  slab  program uses a unique technique  It first divides the slab into  finite number of discrete points and then calculates stress on those  nodes to create moment envelope  Please note that program    automatically transforms stresses to the specified longitudinal  direction     To generate moment envelope you first need to define longitudinal  reinforcement direction  You can define X Z coordinate to define  an axis or click on any two points on the screen     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 146    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Envelope Generation     
121. e Factor    The Graph Scale Factor allows you to change the vertical  exaggeration factor of the stress diagram in the Graphics Window     Stress Type    The Stress Type drop down list box allows you to the type of plate  stress you want to plot along the cut line     Insert a new Cut Line    Now click on the button labeled Insert a new Cut Line  The  following figure appears in the graphics window     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 159       Now click the button labeled Design Selected Line  A dialog box  labeled Design Report Along a Selected Line will be displayed           IM Design report along a cut line  x  Select Graph Type     Moment Envelope C Reqd  Reinforcement Area   SetDesign Parameters     Design       Moment Envelope   Wood and Armer Devon far Uimats load Gee Dri                                                          0 141 ir   a 365 23 130 54 0 200  3 371  Area a  ft   kz 560 30 00 130 54 Top 0 00 1 0 00  2 Bottom 2013 i 0 00  3 560 2201 130 54 Top 0 00 1 0 00  4 Bottom  0 01 1 0 00  5 561 18 02 130 54 Top 0 32 1 0 00  8 Bottom 0 00 1 0 00  7 i 4203 130 54 Top 0 73 1 0 00  8 Bottom 0 00 1 0 00  p 561 205 130 54 Top 1 43 1 0 00  10 Bottom 0 00 1 0 00  A  562 0 06 130 54 Top 1 54 1 0 00 x            Print Close    Click on the Design button to calculate the required reinforcement  area for each element along the cut line     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 160    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s M
122. e pile arrangements corresponding to  the pile loads in all the load cases according to the BOCA standard     Calculate  The Calculate button opens a window displaying all possible pile  arrangements corresponding to the pile loads in all the load cases    according to the BOCA standard when the Auto Arrangement radio  option is selected     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 78   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment       3 Pile Arrangement A  Case 1    Case 2   O O     5 Pile Arrangement    6 Pile Arrangement      7 Pile Arrangement    8 Pile Arrangement   9 Pile Arrangement 0 0  10 Pile Arrangement  11 Pile Arrangement  12 Pile Arrangement  13 Pile Arrangement  14 Pile Arrangement  15 Pile Arrangement  16 Pile Arrangement       m e     F E          a   amp   Ia  i     n  i  i        i  i     i  4               A    Go through the tree controls and choose the desired pile  arrangement  After you have chosen the desired pile arrangement   click on the OK button  The pile coordinates of the selected pile  arrangement will be displayed in the table in the Data Area pane   In addition  the diagram of the pile arrangement will be displayed  in the Data Area pane     Manual Arrangement  The Manual Arrangement radio option allows you to enter the pile    arrangement manually by inputting the pile cap coordinates in the  table in the Data Area pane     Note  These are local coordinates for the footing  relative to the  center 
123. e that you  need     e Try to predict the approximate deflected shape of the plate or  slab  For example  a simply supported plate deflects like a  bowl  If you cut a section that intersects the middle of its  edges  the longitudinal section as well as the transverse section  both look like a  U   How many points does one need to  represent the U  Probably four points for each half of the  U   would be a minimum number needed to be able to visualize the  deflected shape  Four points would mean there are three  elements on each half of the  U   thus six elements each in the  local X and Y directions would be required  If the edges of the  element are fixed or monolithic with a concrete beam  the  deflected shape is more like an inverted hat  In this case  one  would perhaps need nine or more points to represent the  deflected shape  That means eight or more elements in that  direction     e Do you have concentrated forces on the surface of the element   If so  you need to have a finer mesh around that region in order  to visualize the deflected shape or the stresses at that location   How many elements are needed is hard to say  But  for  example  one can estimate a circular area around the  concentrated load point  divide that circle into say 30 degree  pie shaped segments  thus obtaining 12 triangular elements  around a circle whose center is the location of the point load     e Do you have holes in the plate  You need a finer mesh around  the holes  Again  there is no easy 
124. e the import facility now  The ability to import  analysis data from other software programs will be provided in a  future release of STAAD foundation        Note  You must first perform an analysis and design on a  STAAD Pro model in STAAD Pro before importing the model  into STAAD foundation        Let us import STAAD Pro US Example No  8 to  STAAD foundation and use the imported geometry and support  reactions to design a mat foundation for the structure  You can  only import a STAAD Pro model that has been successfully  analyzed  because you will want to have the support reactions  available for the foundation design  So  if you have not already run  the analysis for STAAD Pro U S  Example No  8 open the example  in STAAD Pro  C  Spro2007 STAAD Examp US Examp   Examp08 std   run the analysis  and then return to this Quick Tour     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    3 30    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 3     Quick Tour    Pull down the File menu and select the Import command        Open                1C  Temp FileTour afs  2 untitled  afs   3 C  Temp Mat afs   4 untitled  afs          Exit    A file manager dialog box labeled STAADPro File Import will be  displayed     StaadPro File Import 2  x     Look in    SI US  gt   t Ark      JExAMPO1 STD   JEXAMPO7 STD   JEXAMP13 STD    JEXAMPO2 STD INJEXAMPOS STD   JEXAMP14 STD   2  EXAMPO3 STD  S EXAMPO9 S La   JExAMP15 STD    JExAMPO4 STD  S EXAMP10 S Type  STAAD Space Frame   2  EXAMPOS STD  S EX
125. ee        Meshing Setup           Meshing setup  Boundary          Add selected region as         Boundary O Hoe    Control region  Region Identifier   Boundary    Select Boundary    Generate Mesh    Maximum element size    12    in a   C  Optimize based on area e Generate Mesh      Edt selected rea              We may also choose the number of divisions for the mesh and  specify locations of holes  Let us specify an element size of 12  inches  Enter a value of 12 in the Maximum Element Size edit box   In this example project we will not create any holes in the mesh   We are ready to create the mesh  In the list box in the Data Area  pane  highlight the Mesh Identifier Name for your mesh boundary     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 41    Meshing Setup          Meshing setup  Boundary          Add selected region as         Boundary Q Hoe    Control region    Region Identifier    Boundary   Add region    Select Boundary          Generate Mesh    Maximum element size   12   in  C  Optimize based on area      Edit selected regi      Delete selected r          Click on the Generate Mesh button to generate mesh     The program will display a dialog box asking you to choose either a  Quadrilateral Mesh or a Polygonal Mesh     Please choose Meshing Type x       Quadrilateral Meshing       Polygonal Meshing       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  3 42   Section 3     Quick Tour    Verify that the Quadrilateral Meshing radio butto
126. ent       STAAD Analysis and Design          Calculating Joint Displacements  14 42 59 a     Finished Joint Displacement Calculation  0 sec     Processing Element Stiffness Matrix  14 42 59     Processing Global Stiffness Matrix  14 42 59     Finished Processing Global Stiffness Matrix  0 sec     Processing Triangular Factorization  14 42 59     Finished Triangular Factorization  0 sec     Calculating Joint Displacements  14 42 59     Finished Joint Displacement Calculation  0 sec     Processing Element Stiffness Matrix  14 42 59     Processing Global Stiffness Matrix  14 42 59     Finished Processing Global Stiffness Matrix  0 sec     Processing Triangular Factorization  14 43  0     Finished Triangular Factorization  1 sec     Calculating Joint Displacements  14 43  1     Finished Joint Displacement Calculation  0 sec     Tension    Comp  converged  Iters  4 Case 1     Calculating Member Forces  TArt T     Processing Element Stiffness Matrix  14 43  1     Processing Global Stiffness Matrix  14 43  1     Finished Processing Global Stiffness Matrix  0 sec     Processing Triangular Factorization  TENAS  T     Finished Triangular Factorization  0 sec     Calculating Joint Displacements  Tas aa E     Finished Joint Displacement Calculation  0 sec S     Processing Element Stiffness Matrix  14 43  iv        E  KEL LILIT LILIT 14421    D Erncoris   O Warningis     After successful analysis  program will convert analytical results to  physical entity based results to allow user to r
127. enter to centre distance between C1 and C2  is 4 5 meters  The allowable soil pressure at the base of the footing   1 5 m below ground level  is 240 KN m   Assume a steel of grade  Fe 415 in the columns as well as the footing  and a concrete grade  of M 20 in the footing     200   y           450                      1460              1  ie      2880 y     a         I   i i           footing        plan  i  1       i    k     L 2   3080          k       L 2   3080     y  I       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 22   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Put   1350 kN i Pyp   2400 KN     b   loading    ii KAA NN 292 2 wm       Solution    Dimension of Mat  Based on the bearing Capacity given    Length   6 16 m   Width   2 m   Depth   0 95 m    Calculation for base pressure  Self weight of mat   6 16 x 2 x 0 95 x 25 KN   292 6 KN  Total load on the mat    1600 900 200 2  KN   2792 6 KN    2792 6    6 16x2    226 67 KN m   lt  240 KN m   Hence Safe     KN m        Base pressure      Ultimate load for C    Py    1 5 x 900   1350 KN  Ultimate load for Cy   Py   1 5 x 1600   2400 KN    Then uniformly distributed upward load    Pyi  Pu2  6 16 KN m    608 8 KN m    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 23  Calculation for maximum bending moment  Positive bending moment     The maximum positive bending moment is at the face of the  support C    M       608 8 x  1 46 0 25 7 2   446 KN m    Nega
128. eration   5  Design Parameters  E Reinforcement Zoning     Cut slab by a line   8 Calculation sheet    The Mat foundation Job group contains following groups     e Default analysis properties  e Physical beam table   e Pile Layout   e Mesh generation   e Analysis properties   e Mat slab design options    tamilnavarasam com    4 94   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 6 3 1    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Default analysis properties    STAAD foundation mat foundation module is based on physical  modeling environment  So  whenever a physical entity is created   properties associated with that entity will also be created  For  example if we create a mat boundary  properties like slab thickness  and soil properties will also be created and associated to the newly  created boundary automatically  While creating these properties  STAAD foundation takes advantage of default properties setup  options     Clicking on Default analysis properties leaf will bring up a form in  data area pane as shown below     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 95       Unit      Thickness         Subgrade modulus    Unit  Depth          Spring along X  Kx     Spring along Y  Ky   Spring along Z  Kz        The form has five distinct groups    Slab analysis thickness  Slab design thickness  Subgrade modulus  Beam sectional property  Pile spring values    nA Lk         Slab analysis thickness    RangaRakes tamiln
129. ering check for minimum reinforcement        Design Parameters    Grades    Fy  60 ksi    Fe Booo ki    ey    Covers    Top cover h in z  Bottom cover h lin Ne      Rebar Size  Min  bar size   3 X    Max  bar size 11 v    Rebar Spacing    Max  spacing f12 fin T  Min  spacing  2 lin 7    I Consider Wood and Armer moments    IT Ignore check for minimum reinforcement  Result summary   Details report    Switching on off minimum reinforcement    check    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 33    5 1 Mat slab design options   5 Analyze    gt  Output View Options   8s Moment envelope generation   5 Design Parameters  E Reinforcement Zoning    gt  Cut slab by a line     Sy Moment Capacity Check     5 Calculation sheet       Moment Capacity Check       A new tree leaf added in Mat slab design options category to  check the capacity of existing mat slab  Here program allows  the user to define reinforcement layout and program  calculates moment capacity of the slab based on slab  thickness  covers  reinforcement layout etc  User can plot  capacity diagram  actual moment diagram and then compare  those two diagrams and plot failure  or unity check  diagram   If at any portion of the slab  actual moment is more than the  moment capacity  program will identify that portion with red  color and plot failure diagram as shown below  Check has to  be performed for one slab face at a time  So  for all four faces  the check should be performed for 4 ti
130. es   36  Number of Layers 4  Pile Spacing  36    Use Center Pile    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual       4 84   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    By default  program will try to assign equal number of piles for all  concentric circular layers  But that can be changed by editing the  table below        Create Pile Arrangement    Finally click on the Create Pile Arrangement button to create the  pile layout  A dialog box will appear at the left of data area pane  which will show pile layout drawing and a table for pile  coordinates  Pile coordinates in this table are editable     Select Current Arrangement    When we are satisfied with pile layout  click on Select Current  Arrangement to select and apply that layout  Program will check  the pile reaction against pile capacity to make sure pile reactions do  not exceed pile capacity values  A message box will be popped up  to inform where the assignment is successful     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 85  4 6 2 3 Design Parameters        Pile Cap Job    gt  Pile Layout Predefined     amp  Pile Layout Parametric   K Design    Clicking on Design Parameters leaf opens a form in the Data Area  pane that allows you to input standard design control parameters for  use in designing pile caps     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    4 86  Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Env
131. esign Parameter Page   Finish and Design    Indian Verification Problems    Indian Verification Problem 1  Indian Verification Problem 2  Indian Verification Problem 3  Indian Verification Problem 4  Indian Verification Problem 5    4 210  4 214  4 217  4   223  4  226  4 227  4   228  4   229  4   235  4   240  4   243  4   245  4   247  4   249  4   253  4 255    kan      a    AUAUNA  ES E IC  il   NNR RFF DOAN  U   OUN    5 24  5 25  5 26  5 29  5 32  5 34  5 38  5 42  5 44  5 47    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    1 1  System Requirements  Installation and Start up    Section 1       This section includes discussion on the following topics     e Introduction   e Hardware Requirements   e Installation   e Running STAAD foundation    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    1 2   Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up    1 1 Introduction    Thank you for your purchase of STAAD  foundation    STAAD  foundation is an exhaustive analysis  design  and drafting  solution for a variety of foundations that include general foundation  types such as isolated  combined footings  mat foundations  pile  caps and slab on grade and plant foundation such as vertical vessel  foundation and heat exchanger foundation  A part of the  STAAD Pro family of products  STAAD foundation is a cost   saving downstream application that enables engineers to analyze  and design a foundation  STAA
132. esign options group contains following elements     e Analyze   e Output View Options   e Moment envelope generation  e Design parameters   e Reinforcement Zoning   e Cut slab by a line   e Calculation sheet    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 125    4 6 5 1 Analyze       Analyze    Clicking on the Analyze leaf allows you to analyze a mat  foundation  All data relevant to performing an analysis  including  slab boundary  plate thickness and soil properties  must be entered  prior to selecting this command  otherwise you will not obtain a  successful analysis  After clicking on the Analyze leaf  output pane  will display analysis progress messages where program will create  an analytical model by decomposition of the foundation structure     Output on na   Translating meshed Coordinates       Translating Beams       Translating Plates      Creating Plates and assigning plate property     Processing Load Info      Processing Load case 1   Processing Load case 2   Processing analytical beam loading       Haru   Design Progress Report         After analytical model is created  program will launch its analysis  engine to analyze the structure  A separate window will be shown  displaying analysis progress messages  Once the analysis is  completed this window will be automatically dismissed     tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 126   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environm
133. essing Load Case 1    E D PE AA AA AA AA AA AAA E    Processing Load Case 1 for Coner Pressure    A detailed calculation sheet will be generated in the    Calculation  Sheet    tab  A graphical report of Bending Moment and Shear Force  for the footing will be generated in the    Strip Footing Graph    tab as  follows     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 177    Detail Drawing Calculation Sheet   Strip Footing Graph     Select strip footing index   Footing C1  vy  Select loadcase   1 Loadt x                       14 111 130 303  156 36        z 93 82      3 31 27  2       31 27      93 82  E  10 835  130 303      156 36    0 00 239 4 79 718 958 11 97 14 37 16 76 1916 21 55 23 95 26 34 28 29 93  Length  m      0 000 0 000     z 0 00   3  173 28      E  346 56      E  519 85      2 2 009   693 13       3  866 41    00 239 479 718 958 11 97 14 37 16 76 19 16 21 55 23 95 26 34 28 29 93    Length  m     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 178   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 8 Octagonal Footing    In this job setup you can design an octagonal footing     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 179  4 8 1 Creating Octagonal Footing Job    Create support from    Column Position    as follows and add loads as  described earlier  Now go to    Create New Job     Give a suitable job  name  Choose    Job Type    as    Oc
134. et Column Dimension    C  Consider Pedestal  Column Type     Rectangular    Circular    Unit  lin v  Column Depth 12    Column width  12    A OK Q Cancel    You can specify whether the column is rectangular or circular and  input column dimension  If you want to add a pedestal  click on the  option called    Consider Pedestal     It will change the input from  column type to pedestal type  For pedestal in addition to the plan  dimension you can specify pedestal height     Rectangular Mat Wizard    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 230   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    This option provides a simple wizard to create mat foundation job   Using this option you can create a job  define boundary  mesh it  and define analysis properties     STAAD  foundation Mat Foundation modeling wizard    Job setup Boundary setup  Job name      X coordinate at Top left comer   o  Length Unit    in v  Z coordinate at Top left comer  0  Default unit Type   English _ i   Length  fo Ot  Z1   Design code   us xij aT 0 1 E  ianed   Al supports   R  Support assigned   All supports   YLevet  0   Eenok  Meshing Slab Property  Meshing type    Quadrilate      Analysis thickness  12    Element size  2     Design thickness  12    0 04    kipzin2in      Subgrade modulus        The following commands are available to create rectangular mat  foundation     Job name  It   s an identifier to assign each job a unique name   Length Unit 
135. ete  amp  Rebar    7 Cover  amp  Soil   Ss Footing Geometry     gt  Design    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 169  4 7 3 1 Concrete and Rebar    Here you have to give all the necessary inputs related to concrete  and reinforcement bar to be used     Concrete and Rebar                            Concrete       TB FAT YSVAYA    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 170   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Unit weight of Concrete       Unit weight of concrete with proper unit     Minimum Bar Spacing       Minimum spacing of bar to use for design     Maximum Bar Spacing       Maximum spacing of bar to use for design   Fc    Strength of concrete   Fy  Strength of steel     Minimum Bar Dia       Minimum diameter of bar to use for design     Maximum Bar Dia       Maximum diameter of bar to use for design   Set as Default  Set    Yes    to save the data set for the application  so that each time    you create such job  these fields will be populated with this value  set  Else set    No        tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 171    4 7 3 2    Cover and Soil    In this page you have to enter parameters related to clear covers    and soil data     Cover and Soil                in             in              Ikipin3          Ikipin2                         tamilnavarasam com    4 172   Section 4     STAAD foun
136. ete a load combination  select a row and then click on     Delete    to delete any particular load combination from the list     But to delete any combination from the INI file you need to click  on    Update Table    after clicking on    Delete        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 21    5 2 7    Design Parameter Page    Design parameter is grouped under three categories  They are  Material Density  Bearing and Stability and Concrete Design    Parameters    Material Density    Water Density 62 4 lbjft3 M    Consider Buoyancy    Bearing and Stability       Allowable Bearing Pressure  0 kip Ft2 M  Concrete Design Parameters   Bar Type   Imperial v   Fe 0 ksi m   Minimum Bar Dia Is A       Water Density          Concrete Density  0  Ib Ft3 v   Soil Density  0    bjfts mM  Minimun Stability Ratio   1 5   Cover  0 in y   Fy  0    ksi iv    Maximum Bar Dia Is A       Density of water with unit to use for Buoyancy Check  To check for  buoyancy you need to check on the check box    Consider    Buoyancy        Concrete Density       Density of concrete with proper unit     Soil Density    Density of soil with proper unit     Allowable Bearing Pressure       Value of allowable bearing pressure used for design     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 22   Section 4      STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Minimum Stability ratio       Value of minimum stability rati
137. etup    Show Nodal Displacement    Use Average Normal         Show Beam Displacement  Drawing Options         Draw Line Diagram    Draw 3D diagram    Stress Contour    Beam Stress       Show Plate Stress       Show Soil Pressure    Plate Stress Settings       Select Stress Type   None       Beam Stress Settings    Select Stress Type         Show Legend   C  Plot Contour on Deflected Shape          tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 139    The following options are available to setup output view options  Show Nodal Displacement    Selecting this option will show displacement diagram for current  load case in graphic area  The color picker control next to this  check box allows user to select a suitable color to be used to draw  the displacement diagram     Use Average Normal    This option is used to draw 3D displacement diagram where  lighting will be applied to the average normal direction     Show Beam Displacement    Selecting this option will allow user to draw beam displacement  diagram if present in current job  The color picker control at right  side of this checkbox allows user to choose a suitable color which  will be used to draw beam displacement diagram     Drawing options    Displacement diagrams can be drawn as wireframe or as a true 3D  solid diagram  Draw line diagram option will draw a wireframe  diagram of the displaced shape  Draw 3D diagram will draw plates  and beam displacements as 3D solid diagram     Stress 
138. eview output and  design slab     By default  the deformed plates showing the node displacements  will appear in the Graphics Window  To change the viewing scale  of the displacement diagram  click on the Scale icon in toolbar     ne    It will open a form in the data area pane  Change the Displacement  scale for suitable display of results diagram  Please note that  increasing scale will make diagram appear smaller     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 127    Scale setup      Result Scales    Displacement    0 01   a       After successful analysis  the program will add several tabs in  output pane to display different output results like node  displacement  plate stress  support reaction etc  Tabs for beam  analysis results like beam section force will be added if the current  job has physical beams defined     NAN   Design Progress Report Displacement Disp Summary Reaction Summary A Contact Area A Plate Stress A Plate Stress Summary    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 128   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 5 2 Displacement    Design Progress Report A Displacement 4 Disp Summary 4 Reaction 4 Reaction Summary       Click on the Displacement tab to view node displacement table for  all nodes for current load case as selected in select current load  case icon in toolbar     1  1 4DL   1 7LL        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com       Section 4     STAAD fo
139. fers a set of  dockable  and  floating   toolbars for quick access to frequently used commands  By default   the toolbar icons appear at the top of the STAAD foundation screen  immediately below the menu bar  You may  however  drag each  toolbar and place it at any position on the screen  hence the term   floating    In addition  if you drag a floating toolbar close to the  edge of the screen  the toolbar gets embedded at the side the screen   hence the term  dockable    The title of a  docked  toolbar is not  displayed  However  if you drag the toolbar and leave it  floating   on the screen  a title is displayed at the top of the toolbar     Each toolbar icon offers tooltip help  If you are not sure what a  toolbar icon does  place your mouse cursor over the toolbar icon  for a moment and a floating help message appears to identify what  the toolbar icon does     STAAD foundation offers several toolbars  each of which contains  several toolbar icons  The following toolbars are available     e Standard Toolbar  e Rotate Toolbar  e Zoom Toolbar  e Select Toolbar    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 210   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  Standard Toolbar    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Standard toolbar has several icons in it and can be categorized as  followings    File Toolbar   Print Toolbar   Import Toolbar   Save Picture   Change Job   Change Current Load Case  Tools Toolbar  Loading Toolbar  View Options Toolbar  Unit setup 
140. fields  STAAD foundation will calculate any  value left unspecified for you    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual  4 66   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Footing Type    Two types of Footing are used  Uniform Thickness and Sloped  By  default Uniform Thickness is been set as shown below     Footing Geometry                   RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 67    When you choose Sloped footing type the dialog will appear as  shown below and two new fields will be added  Minimum Slope End  Thickness and Maximum Slope End Thickness     Footing Geometry S       Minimum Slope  End Thickness       Maximum Slope  End Thickness          Design Type    In the design type field  two design types are given  Calculate  dimension and Set dimension     Calculate Dimension Option calculates the actual required    dimension from minimum and maximum range and Set dimension  option sets the user input dimension     If you choose Set Dimension and Uniform thickness footing type   the following fields will be read only     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 68   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Footing Geometry                    lt       _ Read Only Fields                      If you choose Set Dimension and Sloped footing type  the following  fields will be read only     Footing Geometry    ension             Read Only
141. foundation     User   s Manual    Fob 4dr    Loading toolbar allows you to add selfweight and other physical  load items like circular load  quadrilateral load etc  to the current  load case    Loading toolbar has following icons    e Add Self weight   e Add Circular Pressure Load   e Add Quadrilateral Pressure Load  e Add Point load on space   e Add column reaction load   e Add line load    Add Self Weight    This option allows user to add self weight to the selected or all load  cases  This self weight definition is only applicable for Mat  foundation as program will not add self weight of the mat slab by  default  For other types of footing like isolated or combined footing  program automatically adds self weight for all service load cases   Clicking on this button will open a dialog box where all load cases  in the project will be listed  Check Include check box to include  self weight to a load case  At the bottom of the dialog box there is a  control to check on off all load cases  Click on OK to  assign unassign self weight     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 233  Add Self Weight A    STAAD  foundation Add Selfweight    Load Title    1 4DL   1 7LL   7 75 1 4DL   1 7LL   1 7WL         v  Select All  at  Add Circular Pressure Load    This option allows user to add a circular pressure load to the  current load case  Please note  circular pressure is applicable only  to mat foundation  To create the circular pressure load clic
142. global Y axis  in the direction indicated by the circular  arrow in the icon     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 249    Spin Left    The Spin Left icon allows you to spin the view of a structure about  the global Z axis  in the direction indicated by the circular arrow in  the icon     Spin Right    The Spin Right icon allows you to spin the view of a structure about  the global Z axis  in the direction indicated by the circular arrow in  the icon     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 250   Section 4   STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 10 4 Zoom Toolbar    Zoom Vindow    Zoom In 7          The Zoom Toolbar allows you to alter the viewing distance of the  objects in the Graphics Window     The Zoom Toolbar contains the following toolbar icons   e Zoom In  e Zoom Out  e Zoom Window    e Zoom All  e Pan    Zoom In    The Zoom In icon allows you to move in closer to the objects in the  Graphics Window     Zoom Out    The Zoom Out icon allows you to move farther away from the  objects in the Graphics Window     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 251    Zoom Window    The Zoom Window icon allows you to create a selection around an  area in the Graphics Window that you would like zoom in on  The  area that is selected will occupy the entire Graphics Window     Zoom All    The Zoom All icon allows you to return to the viewing di
143. gn Convention of Element Forces   e STAAD foundation Program Theory    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    2 2   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    2 1    Introduction to Finite Element Analysis    If you want to model a surface entity like a wall  a roof or a slab   where the load is distributed in more than one direction  you need a  surface entity to carry that kind of loading  The kind of entity that  is used to model a beam or a column cannot be used to model a  slab  We need to use another kind of structural entity known as a  finite element  In a finite element analysis  you take a wall or a  slab and subdivide it into smaller parts consisting of triangles or  quadrilaterals     Finite elements are often referred to as plates  In our discussion   we may use these two words interchangeably     The difference between a beam and a plate is a load that is applied  to a beam can only go in two directions  towards one end  or the  other  or both        In a plate  there is more than one path for the load to flow     P    tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 3    A plate can be 3 noded  triangular  or 4 noded  quadrilateral   The  thickness of an element may be different from one node to another    All nodes of a 4 noded plate must lie in the same plane  If the four  nodes of a quadrilateral element do not lie on one plane  you should  replace the quadrilateral element with two triangular elements     It 
144. grees of freedom  and then three rotational degrees of freedom  First row of each  degree of freedom starts with maximum value  Please note  here  minimum and maximum are algebraic signed values           0 000000  0 296130  0 000000  0 002332  0 000000  0 000834       0 000000  0 296130 0 000000  0 002332  0 000000  0 000834          693 0 000000  0 049418  0 000000  0 000150  0 000000    0 000102   1320 0 000000   0 792754  0 000000  0 005146  0 000000       0 003932   1 0 000000   0 296130  0 000000   0 002332  0 000000  0 000834  0 000000   0 296130  0 000000   0 002332  0 000000  0 000834   1144 0 000000   0 523888  0 000000  0 006002  0 000000 _  0 003256   220 a 0 000000   0519242  0 000000   0 005586  0 000000    0 003260 _       0 000000    0296130  0 000000    0 002332  0 000000  0 000834  0 000000   0 296130  0 000000    0 002332  0 000000  0 000834     0 000000   0 472672  0 000000  0 004098  0 000000  0 003573   0 000000    _  0 579236  0 000000  0 004439  0 000000 _  0 004835          ae  ee ae  oe  ae PI oe  ef oe  oe   aS                         RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 6 5 4        Support  Reaction s     STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    4 132  Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment      Design Progress Report   Displacement A Disp Summary    Reaction    Reaction Summary    Click on the Reaction tab to review support reaction results  This  option is available only if the mat is supported on soil  In case of  mat su
145. group called     Isolated Footing Job    is created  This group allows you to enter  design parameters like footing geometry  concrete cover  soil  parameters etc  As Design Parameters forms are self explanatory   we will not discuss them in this Quick Tour        Job Setup    5 Create a New Job   kz Edit Current Job    5 Delete Job       4 Design Parameters    S5 Concrete  amp  Rebar  E Cover  amp  Soil   5 Footing Geometry  E Sliding  amp  Overturning   Gy Design    Note  STAAD foundation gives the user flexibility to check an  existing foundation by specifying footing geometry like Length   Width and Thickness or design a new foundation where the  program will calculate footing dimension        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 24   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 7 Performing an Isolated Footing Design    Now click on the    Design    leaf under    Design Parameters    group  in Main Navigator pane to design the footing     5  Isolated Footing Job  ES Design Parameters   5 Concrete  amp  Rebar   ey Cover  amp  Soil   5 Footing Geometry    Sliding  amp  Overturning    Look at the Output pane  it will display a series of messages as the  program performs the footing design           Set initial footing dimension as 7 000 X7 000 X10 00    Set footing dimension as 7 000 X7 000 X10 00  after checking service load conditions   Set footing dimension as 7 000 X7 000 X10 00  after checking design load conditions   Performing punching shear c
146. guideline for how many  elements there should be  Your engineering judgment is often  the best guideline     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    2 6   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    2 2    Element Load Specification    The following load specifications are available   1  Joint loads at element nodes in global directions     2  Concentrated loads at any user specified point within the  element in global or local directions     3  Uniform pressure on an element surface in global or local  directions     4  Partial uniform pressure on a user specified portion of an  element surface in global or local directions     5  Linearly varying pressure on an element surface in local  directions     tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 7    2 3 Theoretical Basis    The STAAD plate finite element is based on hybrid finite element  formulations  A complete guadratic stress distribution is assumed   For plane stress action  the assumed stress distribution is as  follows        a4  o  Mx y 00 0 0 x  2y 0 az  c  I lo 0 01x y 0 y  0 2y la  ty   0  y 0 0 0  x 1  3y  y   x          a10    a  through aio   constants of stress polynomials     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  2 8   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    The following quadratic stress distribution is assumed for plate  bending action        Complete quadratic assumed stress distribution     ay  M   4x yoo0o000 x  wo 0 a 
147. h Unit   in A    Y Position   0    zi   70    z2  70    z3   30  z4  90          tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 235    Add Point Load on Space    This option allows user to create a point load on space  This option  is available only for mat foundation  Click on any grid intersection  point and the program will add a point load at that point  After  clicking on a grid intersection point a dialog box appears which  will allow user to input load values for all six degrees of freedom     Add Point Load  STAAD  foundation Add Point Load   Force     Position   Force Unit    kip         Moment unit  kipin   Length Unit in K    Force along X  0 oana 4 0      Force along Y  0       Y Coordinate   0    Force along Z  Io AA    Moment about X   0   Roni p    Moment about Y    D    Moment about Z  io      Add Column reaction load    This option allows user to add a reaction load to a support position   After clicking on this icon click on any support node and a dialog  box will appear allowing you to input load values  Input load values  and click on OK program will create the reaction load and assign to  the selected support     tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 236   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    STAAD  foundation 444 reaction toadin    Force Load values                   Force along x  0   pean mv Force along Y  0  ee en Force along Z  0  Moment about   0   Moment abo
148. h the critical planes located at both  orthogonal faces of the pedestal and extending across  the full width length of the footing     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    2 28   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    Wo 2    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com      82d  Quick Tour    Section 3    This section includes discussion on the following topics        e Introduction   e Starting a New Project   e Entering Support Coordinates   e Defining the Loads   e Using Jobs to Specify Design Constraints   e Entering Design Parameters   e Performing an Isolated Footing Design   e Importing Structural Geometry and Analysis Results from  STAAD Pro   e Creating a New Job for a Mat Foundation   e Setting up the Grid and Defining the Mat Boundary   e Creating a Mesh   e Specifying Slab Thickness   e Defining Soil Properties   e Analyzing the Slab   e Slab Design   e Pile Cap Example   e Entering Pile Data   e Entering Pile Cap Design Parameters   e Performing Pile Cap Design and Viewing Results   e Exporting Drawings to CAD   e Strip footing design example   e Entering strip footing design parameters   e Design strip footing and review results    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 2   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 1    Introduction    This Quick Tour is a set of short example exercises that illustrate  how to use STAAD  foundation to design several different types of  foundations  The procedure for impor
149. he Project Info  Foundation Plan   Loads and Factors and Job Setup groups will appear in the  Navigator pane  These four groups allow you to specify the  physical model upon which the foundation design is performed   It is only when you specify a Job  a set of constraints for  STAAD foundation to use in performing a foundation design   that the groups related to the design will appear                    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 10   Section 4   STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    The Project Info Group        3 Project Info   5 General Information   57 Review History    Modeling View Options   Ss Scale setup options    The Project Info group allows you to input general info about a  project  as well as create a revision history for a project  The  Project Info group is active by default when you open a new or  existing project  Using this group you can scale objects for better  visibility or can switch on off objects as needed     Use of the Project Info group is optional  It is provided for your  convenience  You can store relevant general information regarding  a project and also create a revision history  Later on  you can  instruct STAAD foundation to display this information in reports  and drawings     The Project Info group contains the following elements     e General Information   e Review History   e Modeling View Options  e Scale Setup Options    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD founda
150. heck    Clear cover 2 000000   PASSED   Performing one way shear check    PASSED   Performing design for bottom X direction rebars    PASSED   Performing design for bottom Z direction rebars    PASSED    M 4  gt          Design Progress Report Isofoot Design Summary       When the design is complete  the program will automatically  display a Design Summary table in the Output pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 25          Click on the    Layout Drawing    tab in view pane area to check  footing overlap  It produces a layout of analyzed footings drawn to  scale  complete with a title block for the drawing        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 26   Section 3     Quick Tour       Click on the    Detail Drawing    tab in view pane area to see footing  detailed drawing  The detailed drawing displays a schematic  diagram of the footing elevation and reinforcement plan                4 Start Page Geometr Re Detail Drawing Layout Drawing Calculation Sheet Strip Footing Graph    totok    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 27    Isolated Footing   Reinforcement Plan    Isolated Footing   Reinforcement Section       A click on the    Calculation Sheet    tab in view pane brings up the  design calculation of the footings  It displays step by step  calculation with relevant code clause numbers and equations     Critical Axial design Load  Pu   0 00 kip  Load Case   2    From ACI C1 
151. hing regions which are mat  boundary  holes  control regions etc  Four methods are used to  create meshing regions which are    e Using polyline   e Add a rectangular region  e Add a circular region   e Regular polygon    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 106   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 6 3 4 1 1 Using polyline    The Using polyline option allows you to draw on the grid a mat  boundary that represents the edge of a slab  To draw a mat  boundary  click in sequence on the points on the grid going in  either a clockwise or a counter clockwise order  Once you have  clicked on all the points that define the boundary of your slab   return to your starting point or right click  You will see a blue  closed polygon defining the boundary you have created     In the figure below blue lines indicate those points are already  clicked and yellow lines shows possible closed polygon  connectivity        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4      STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 107  4 6 3 4 1 2 Add a rectangular region    Clicking on Add a rectangular region option will open a form in  data area pane that allows you to create a rectangular region     Data Input Pz a x  Rectangular Boundary  Define Rectangular Region  Uni   in v    x coordinate at Top left comer           Z coordinate at Top left corer           Length   515    X1  Z1     Width  1345  Y Level  0 Length         Add Region          It   s a 
152. ient  Cf        Value of    Cf  according to the table T6 10     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    5 38    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    5 3 5    Seismic Load Generation Page    Inputs for seismic load can be given in two ways  same as for wind  load  You can directly input the shear force  amp  moment values with  choosing the proper unit or you can use the software to calculate  those values using ASCE 7 2005     Check the    Directly Input Seismic Load    check box to use your  own calculated value for shear force and moment         Directly Input Seismic Load  TESTE Sea Sesimic Ground Motion Values    Shear  Fx 0  Shear  Fz  0    Unit    kip     lt        Moment   Mx  0  Moment   Mz  0    Unit    kipin Iv  Fundamental Period  T     Seismic Response Coefficient Parameters    For direct input give the calculated value of shear and moment in  both directions with proper choice of unit     Else uncheck the above said check box to use the software to  calculate the values for you  Again that can be done in two ways   You can select US Zip code to get the parametric values or else you  can provide their values from your own knowledge     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 39     Directly Input Seismic Load Sesimic Ground Motion Values    O Select using Zip Code   Enter Value Manually  si  0 074 g  55  0 25 g  Site Class   C lv       Fundamental Period  T  
153. ign code to be used to design  the slab  Click on Import button and that will import the slab along  with plate stresses and node displacements for selected load cases   The program will automatically create a mat foundation job     Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 197    tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 198   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    STAAI  foundation Import utitity          Jv  40L ALL   Primary    75 1 4DL   1 7LL   1 7WL   Primary    E  Select All  Import Type   impor       Import Supported Nodes  meat   O Import Plates Level             Design Code    Default Unit Type  5    Recent Project Files    The area below the Print Setup menu command displays a list of  four Recent Project Files you have worked on  Selecting a project    from the list will open the project     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 199  4 9 2 Edit Menu    The Edit menu allows you to perform editing operations         The Edit menu contains the following menu command     e Delete  Delete    The Delete menu command deletes the selected item s   The Delete  command is only active when a relevant item like support position   beam  pile etc  is selected     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 200   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 9 3 View Menu    The View menu contains commands that turns various toolba
154. ilnavarasam com    4 154   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Steel Detailing    Click this button to plot the location of the reinforcing steel bars on  the model view     ill  i     lI  lil    Even after block generation reinforcement zones may not become  regular rectangular blocks  So  the program has an option to  visually adjust those zones to form rectangular regions        Zone editing    Select Zone    Select the current zone to be edited  He drop down box will show  color and zone number     Select Nodes    Clicking on select nodes button will change the button status and  will allow user to select grid points to be edited  Click on the  graphics and draw a rubber band to select nodes  Nodes will be  highlighted in yellow color     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 155    Reset zone    Click on reset zone button to edit the selected points  Current zone  will be assigned to the selected node  Please note that if Lock  Higher Zone option is selected  program will not overwrite higher  zone with lower zone  This option is recommended to be always  selected     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 156   Section 4   STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 6 6 4 Section Design along a Line       4 Mat slab design options   5 Analyze  E Output View Options   8s Moment envelope generation   Ss Design Parameters  
155. in Bar Spacing     Soil Depth  0  Max Bar Size  3 Load Surcharge  0   Min Bar Size   10 Area in Contact Percent  0 Yy    Sliding and Overturning  Coefficient of Friction 0 5 Factor of Safety  Sliding    1 5 Factor of Safety  Overturning    1 5    Unit    First give the units for three types of dimensions  density  length  and stress     Concrete and Rebar    Concrete Unit Weight       Unit weight of concrete   Fc    Strength of concrete     Fy    Strength of steel     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 45    Minimum Bar Spacing       Minimum spacing of bar to use for design     Maximum Bar Spacing       Maximum spacing of bar to use for design     Minimum Bar Size       Minimum diameter of bar to use for design     Maximum Bar Size          Maximum diameter of bar to use for design   Cover and Soil    Pedestal Clear Cover       Clear cover for pedestal     Footing Bottom Cover       Bottom clear cover for the footing     Soil Unit Weight       Unit weight of soil     Soil Bearing Capacity       Allowable Bearing Capacity of soil     Soil Depth    Depth of soil     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 46   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Load Surcharge    The surcharge load     Area in Contact Percent       Percentage of area of contact between footing and soil     Sliding and Overturning    Coefficient of Friction       Frictional coefficient used for design 
156. ince you have  done a substantial amount of work to get to this point  Pull down  the File menu and select the Save command     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 38   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 11 Creating a Mesh    Now we are ready to add the boundary and create the mesh  Click  on the Meshing Setup leaf under Mesh generation group        5 Mesh generation      Add meshing regions    amp  Using polyline   6 Add a rectangular region    gt  Add a circular region    amp  Regular polygon    The Meshing Setup page will be displayed in the Data Area pane     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 39  Data Input Pane ax  H Meshing Setup         Meshing setup    Add selected region as       Boundary    Hoe    Control region    Region Identifier    Add region    Select Boundary  Generate Mesh    Maximum element size   12 in v     C  Optimize based on area   Generate Mesh  Q Edit selected regi    A Delete selected r       Click in the Graphics Window with the cursor on a line of the  boundary  The boundary changes color        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 3     Quick Tour    Make sure the Boundary radio button is checked and give a title  for the boundary in Region Identifier edit box  Click on    Add  Region    button to add the boundary  You will see that the Region  Identifier name you entered is now listed under the Meshing Setup  heading in the tr
157. inked to together with  transverse members  In order to use Translational Repeat  you must  first select at least one object before the command will become  available     Translational Repeat 1 xj    No  of Steps   0 J Link Steps    m Increment    X Increment       Y Increment   0      Z Increment   0                The Translational Repeat dialog box contains the following fields  and options     e No  of Steps   e Increment   e Link Steps  No  of Steps    The No  of Steps field allows you to specify the number of copies to  make     Increment    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 228   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    The Increment group box allows you to specify the distance from  the original object s  to the copied object s   When No  of Steps is  greater than 1  the increment values will also specify the distance  between the multiple copied objects  The increment unit used is  specified in the Change Length Unit drop down list box in the  Tools toolbar     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 229    Link Steps    The Link Steps check box allows you to specify whether the copied  objects should be linked together with transverse members     Set Column or Pedestal Dimension    This option will only be enabled if any support position is selected   Clicking on the menu item will open a dialog box which will allow  user to set column or pedestal dimension     S
158. ion     5 Design Parameters  E Reinforcement Zoning     2 1 cut slab by a line E      amp  Calculation sheet    A new form will appear in the Data Area pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 64   Section 3     Quick Tour    Po         Cut slab by a line    Slab cut options       By drawing a line on slab      Se f it v     By specifying coordinates Unit      StarinaX  0 Starting Z       EndngX  100   Endnoz  0      Interpolation Factor   3          Graph Scale Factor  1             Stress Type     MX x     insert a new cut Li                     Design Selected Line    Under the Slab cut options category  select the    By drawing a line  on slab    radio button  and then click in the graphics window  This  will allow you to create a section in the plan view of your model     Enter a value of 3 in the Interpolation Factor edit box     In the Stress Type drop down menu  select MX to look for Mx  moment along the cut line     Now  draw a section line on the plan view of your model along  which you wish to see the graph of the maximum absolute stress     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 65    Click your mouse cursor at the beginning point of the line  drag  your cursor to the end point  and then click again         Z    kip ttzft    8  3  8     24 574   18 360  12146  5 932  0 282  6 436  12710  18 924  25138  31 352  37 566  43 780  49 994  56 209    R     3    68 637    Note that the coordinates of Sta
159. ion   e Screen Organization  GUI   e Navigator Controls   e Menu Commands   e Toolbars    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 2   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 1    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Introduction    This section provides an overview of STAAD foundation   s  graphical user interface  GUI   STAAD foundation combines the  menu driven functionality of the Windows environment with the  user friendly split window functionality available in programs like  Microsoft Outlook     In STAAD  foundation  you start out by creating a Project to hold  physical information  such as column locations  column dimensions   piles  beams  and loads  The physical information represents the  structure that a foundation is intended to support  Unless the  design of the structure is modified  these physical conditions  generally remain constant throughout the life of a foundation design  project  Your project also contains Jobs  which are sets of  constraints needed to tell STAAD foundation how to perform a  foundation design  Each project may contain multiple jobs  making  it easy for you to evaluate different design scenarios for a given set  of physical conditions     Once a project is created  it can be saved and re opened later using  the File   Save and File   Open menu commands  Project files are  saved with an  afs extension     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 3    4 2  
160. ion  The final plan dimensions of the footing are  established iteratively from the condition that the maximum  stress should not exceed the factored bearing resistance of  the soil     Step 2   Calculate footing thickness based on structural  capacity in shear and bending     Structural design of the footing consists of the following     a  Punching shear check  in accordance with Section  11 12 2  at a distance of d 2 from the pedestal  The    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    2 20    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 2     Theoretical Basis    critical section comprises four straight line segments   parallel to the corresponding sides of the pedestal    b  One way shear  beam action   in accordance with  Sections 11 1 through 11 5  at a distance of d from the  face of the pedestal  in both orthogonal directions  The  critical plane is assumed to extend over the entire  width length of the footing    c  Bending  in accordance with Sections 15 4 2 and  10 3 4  with the critical planes located at both  orthogonal faces of the pedestal and extending across  the full width length of the footing     Pile Cap  The program produces the following design output     a  Required pile quantity and layout to satisfy loading  applied to the footing  based on bearing  uplift and  lateral pile capacity    b  Geometry of the pile cap based on shear and bending  strength requirements at critical sections of the footing     Step 1   Pile Arrangement    The user provides the f
161. ironment                   RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 87    The following design parameters are available     e Strength of Concrete   e Yield Strength of Steel  e Side Cover  Cs    e Bottom Cover  Cb    e Pile in Pile Cap  Cp    e Initial Thickness   e Minimum Bar Size   e Maximum Bar Size       Note  The Pile in Pile Cap parameter refers to the length of the  pile that is contained within the pile cap  as shown by the Cp  parameter in the diagram at the top of the Data Area pane        Set as Default    The Set as Default check box allows you to use the values inputted  in the Design Parameters form as the default values for future  projects     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  4 88   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 2 4 Design        Pile Cap Job   35 Pile Layout Predefined    5 Pile Layout Parametric   E Design Parameters   Gy Design    Click on Design leaf to design all the footings associated in the  current job  Program will list all design progress messages  including warning and error messages in the bottom output pane  It  will help user to understand and review design progress        Processing Node number 1   Setting design parameters   Calculating pile cap thickness   Organizing data for critical load case   Thickness  Calculating reinforcement   Organizing data for critical load case   Reinforcement    Heru Design Progress Report Pile
162. is not possible to accurately model the behavior of a slab using  just a single element  Why not  One reason is you can determine  the displacements in the finite element only at the corner nodes   With a beam  if you know the displacements at the ends  you can  use secondary analysis techniques like the moment area method to  determine the displacements at intermediate points        In a plate  there are no equations you can use to determine the  displacement at some arbitrary point within the 3 or 4 corners of  the element  Therefore  if you would like to know the  displacements at some interior points of the slab  or if you would  like to know the deformed shape along the edges of the slab  it is  necessary to model the slab using a series of plate elements in such  a manner that the points of interest become nodes of the elements     Similarly  you can accurately determine the stresses only at the  center of the element  The only way to find the stresses at other  points is to interpolate values at points between the centers of  adjacent elements     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    2 4   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    Suppose you had a slab supported by a frame  and under load it had  a deflected shape something like that shown in the figure below     In order to obtain deflection information that would allow you to  plot the deflected shape  you would need to at least know the  deflections at the points of maximu
163. k on any  grid intersection point and that will become the center of the circle  and then drag the mouse to the desired circular radius and release  the mouse on a grid intersection node  The distance between the  first point and second point is the radius of the circle  If the mouse  cursor is not released on a grid intersection point load will not be  created  After successful mouse release on a grid intersection point  a dialog box will appear where you can input pressure and modify  center and radius values     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 234   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    STAAD  foundation Add Circular Load       Pressure     Radius     Division           Length Unit  lin w   Center x   30    Center Y   o i    CenterZ  8          Add Quadrilateral Pressure Load    This option allows user to add a quadrilateral pressure load to the  current load case  Please note  quadrilateral pressure is applicable  only to mat foundation  To create the quadrilateral pressure load  click on any grid intersection point and that will become the top  left corner of the rectangle  Draw the rubber band and release the  mouse cursor on a grid intersection point which will be bottom  right corner of the rectangle  A dialog box will appear which will  allow you to input pressure and modify coordinates     STAAD  fou ndatio Vb Add Quad Loading    Force Unit     Force     xT     x2   x3   x              Lengt
164. kes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 61    Panel No  1       Please note that the slab is divided in three different reinforcing  zones where Zone   is blue and lowest zone  Often times    Zone 1     represents the minimum reinforcing zone     Zone 3    is red and  represents highest reinforcing zone     It is evident from the graphics that the reinforcement blocks are not  regular shaped polygon  STAAD foundation has an in built tool to  create a regular shape from this irregular shape  Click on the Create  Block button  STAAD foundation will divide the slab into block   shaped areas  based on the reinforcement zones generated by the  Create Reinforcing Zones command     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 62   Section 3     Quick Tour       These rectangular areas are created to allow a practical layout of  the various sizes of reinforcing steel     Click on the Steel Detailing button  The following screen will  come up showing the reinforcement steel details of the three zones  in the plan view        We may also cut the slab by any user defined line and view your  desired stress value  Max absolute Max VonMises SX S Y MX MY    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 63    etc   along that line  Click on the    Cut slab by a line    leaf under     Mat slab design options    group in main navigator pane         Mat slab design options  E Analyze   5 Output View Options   5s Moment envelope generat
165. king on the  Import button  As STAAD Pro does not have the definition for  serviceability and ultimate load type  the user should assign the  right load type attribute to each load case here  By default program  defines all load cases as primary load types     You can import either support coordinates or a slab already  analyzed in STAAD Pro to design in STAAD foundation  To import  support coordinates simply click on import button and it will import  all support positions along with support reactions for all selected  load cases     To import an analyzed slab select Import Plates option and then  enter Y level of the slab position  Program can only import a slab  defined in XZ plane  Now select design code to be used to design  the slab  Click on Import button and that will import the slab along  with plate stresses and node displacements for selected load cases   The program will automatically create a mat foundation job     tamilnavarasam com    4 222   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    STAAD  foundation Import utility    ves   eee ae RTA     1 4DL   1 7LL   Primary  nica 75 1 4DL   1 7LL   1 7WL    Primary                    v  Select All          Import Type    Import Supported Nodes    O Import Plates y Level       Design Code   Default Unit Type      The Jobs Toolbar allows you to create  select  and edit jobs  Jobs  allow you to assign a set of constraints for STAAD foundation to  use in perf
166. l  4 70   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    If you choose Sloped footing type  the Isofoot Design Summary  table  a new column  Slope End Thickness will be added as shown  below           145 00 mn 12mm    Slope End Thickness    Program will automatically open calculation sheet which presents  detailed step by step calculation with relevant code clause numbers   equations and corresponding calculated values  Calculation sheet is  organized in a logical manner which shows program flow     After successful design  you can open Report Setup to print design  summary table  Switch to Geometry view in main view area to  activate toolbar  Now click on Report Setup icon in toolbar     It will open a report setup dialog box where under current job a  summary table will be available  Select that item by clicking that  item in left list box and bring it over to right side by clicking  button  Now click on OK and the dialog box will be dismissed     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 71    Report Setup  x      tem   Header and Logo         Select tem    v    L           Summary Table  JOb1    A Y             Available Selected             Now click on Print Preview icon in toolbar to see print preview and  then click on Print button to print the summary table     L amp        Sofware Mensedt  gt Awel             oTe  Re  E Data na  Cuert Fle Isolated afs DaeTime 21 Aug 2007 13 40    Summary Table  JOb1    Footi
167. l Environment   4 205    STAAD  foundatio n Mat Foundation modeling wizard    Boundary setup          Job setup  Job name        coordinate at Top left comer    0    Length Unit    in   Z coordinate at Top left comer  lo    Default unit Type  engan  y   bangke 10   TE  i    us v   T x  Design code         wich   0   E  Support assigned   AN supports gl      Y Level 9 Length  Meshing Slab Property  Meshing type    Quadrilate    Analysis thickness  12    Element size   12   Design thickness   12    0 04    kipsin2vin se       Gea Subgrade modulus       The following commands are available to create rectangular mat  foundation     Job name  It   s an identifier to assign each job a unique name   Length Unit    Length unit will be used to define mat boundary and to assign slab  thickness     Default Unit Type  Default unit type to be used to setup design parameters   Design Code    Concrete design code  Program currently supports ACI  BS 8110  and IS 456 codes     tamilnavarasam com    4 206   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Support assignment    Select the supports to be assigned to the new mat job  You have the  option to include all supports or selected supports only     Boundary Setup    As it   s a rectangular mat foundation we just need to define top left  corner and then specify Length and Width values of the boundary   The slab will always be in XZ plane  Specify Y level of the slab  too     Me
168. l i Ai Rotate Right  Front View J   isometric View Bag Right    uuu bos    Back View     L  Spin Left    Left Side View   l Left  View From Bottom Rotate Up             The Rotate Toolbar contains two sets of icons  view and rotate  The  view icons allow you to change the viewing angle in the main view  pane with respect to the global axis system  The rotate icons allow  you to rotate the foundation about the origin     The Rotate Toolbar contains the following toolbar icons     e Front View   e Back View   e Right Side View  e Left Side View  e View From Top  e View from Bottom  e Isometric View  e Rotate Up   e Rotate Down   e Rotate Left   e Rotate Right   e Spin Left   e Spin Right    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 247    Front View    The Front View icon allows you to display a foundation as seen  from the front  When the global Y axis is vertical  this is the  elevation view  as looking towards the negative direction of the Z   axis     Back View    The Back View icon allows you to display a foundation as seen  from the back  When the global Y axis is vertical  this is the  elevation view  as seen looking towards the positive direction of the  Z axis     Right Side View    The Right Side View icon allows you to display a foundation as  seen from the right side  When the global Y axis is vertical  this is  the side elevation view  as seen looking towards the negative  direction of the X axis     Left Side View    The Left 
169. lan    gt  Linear Grid Setup   Ss Radial Grid Setup     5 Column Dimension    The Column Positions button opens a spreadsheet table in the Data  Area pane that allows you to input column positions in Cartesian   XYZ  coordinates     Column Position                      After column coordinates are entered  the columns along with their  respective node numbers are displayed in the Graphics Window   The tab key or arrow keys may be used to move from one cell to the  next in the table  The coordinates in the table can be modified like  any spreadsheet  In order to delete a column  select the column in  the Graphics Window by clicking on it  Then either press the delete  key on your keyboard or use the Menu Bar command Edit   Delete     Note  A column will not be shown in the Graphics Window until  you hit Enter or click outside of the row you are currently in        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 29  4 4 2 3 Column Dimensions        Foundation Plan    gt  Linear Grid Setup   5 Radial Grid Setup   ey Column Position    gt  Column Dimension    Clicking on the Column Dimensions leaf opens a spreadsheet table  in the Data Area pane that allows you to specify the depth and  width of the columns at each support location and pedestal  information if any  Column or pedestal dimensions are needed to  check punching shear for a mat foundation  For all other footing  types these dimensions will be used to calculate critical design 
170. lated    e Pile Cap  e Combined  e Mat    e Octagonal    Design Code  It is used to define concrete code to be used  Current  version supports 3 country codes which are    e ACT 318 05  e BS 8110  e IS 456 2000    Default Unit Type  It is used to setup default design parameters of  the job  We support both FPS and SI unit systems  User can choose  any combination of design code and default unit type  In other  words user can choose US design code with SI unit system     Support Assignment  It is used to assign supports to a job  There  are three assignment methods    e Assign to All Supports  e Assign to Selected Supports  e Assign to Listed Supports    Selecting first option Assign to all supports will assign all supports  to the current job  Selecting second option will assign all selected  supports in the main view to the current job     If we select third option which is Assign to Listed Supports  the last  field in the first group Listed Support becomes active and you can  type the support numbers to be assigned to the current job     The bottom group is to assign loads to the current job  All load  cases will be shown in available list box  To include a load case   first select the load case from the list and then click the      4    button  Continue for all load cases to be included  Use the    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 56   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment      button to include all load cases  which
171. layout drawing     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 82   Section 3     Quick Tour    The layout of the pile cap job will show the different supports  along with the pile arrangements and number of piles pertaining to  them           Click on the Detailed Drawing sub page button        Detail Drawing    tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 83  The following screen appears showing the plan of the pile cap  the    details of the reinforcement bar for the pile cap and the front view  of the pile cap along with the column for the support selected     PileCap   Plan    PileCap   Reinforcement Section       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 84   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 20 Exporting Drawings to CAD    Clicking on the Save drawing As    button gives the option to save  the drawing in many formats including DXF and DWG     Save Drawing As       tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 85  3 21 Creating Strip Footing Job    Now let us create a new job inside this same project to illustrate the  process for designing a combined footing     Click on the    Create a new Job    leaf under    Job Setup    group in  main navigator pane  The Create a New Job form will open in data  area pane  Enter job name as    Strip1     Choose Job type as     Combined    and design code as US     Transfer both load cases to    Selected load cases    by clicking     button  Now cli
172. lculates all possible arrangements which  satisfy pile capacity criteria     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 75             2 Pile Arrangement  Case 1    Case 2   ft  3 Pile Arrangement  amp  O     5 Pile Arrangement  H 6 Pile Arrangement  H 7 Pile Arrangement     8 Pile Arrangement 0 O   9 Pile Arrangement     10 Pile Arrangement      11 Pile Arrangement      12 Pile Arrangement              gt     LL      13 Pile Arrangement    14 Pile Arrangement     15 Pile Arrangement    a            s          We go through the tree controls and choose the arrangement  suitable to us  For this example we will choose    4 pile  arrangement     As we click on the OK button  the diagram showing  the pile arrangements is transferred to the dialog box in the Data  Area pane showing the input for pile arrangements  Please notice  that the pile co ordinates have come up in the corresponding table     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 76   Section 3     Quick Tour    Pile Arrangement Type      Auto Arrangement     Calculate     Manual Arrangement   Column location at  0 0                               e Delete Selected Rows    8 Select Arangement  Q Show Pile Reactions    O O  O O    If we click on the button for    Show Pile Reactions     the reaction on  each pile shows up     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 77       19 457          20 382                         Depending on the pile arrangeme
173. lected the desired meshing type and clicked OK   STAAD foundation will create the mesh and display it in the  Graphics Window     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 117       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 118   Section 4   STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 4 Analysis properties       Mat foundation Job   5 Default analysis properties   5 Physical beam table      Sy Pile Layout      Mesh generation       The Analysis properties group allows you to input slab thicknesses   soil properties and pile spring constants  This group is only active  for mat foundation job types     The Analysis properties group contains the following elements   e Slab thickness    e Soil Property  e Pile spring    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 119  4 6 4 1 Slab Thickness        Analysis properties  E Slab thickness   Gy Soil property   285 Pile spring    Clicking on the Slab Thickness leaf opens a table in the Data Area  pane that allows you to change the element thickness for the plate  elements in a mesh you are using to model a mat foundation                 As slab is added as a physical entity in STAAD foundation  default  slab thickness property will be automatically created and assigned  to each slab region     The first row of the table is to select unit for thickness  You can  have only one unit for all slab thickness  Second row onwa
174. ll open in the Data Area pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual  3 20   Section 3     Quick Tour                            Loading  Available Load Cases      1  Load Case 1  2  Live Load    Selected Load Cases    101   Load Case 1   Live Load       The job types may be to design for Isolated  Pile Cap  Mat  Foundation  Strip footing and Octagonal footing  We can assign  the job to all the supports or we can type in the list of supports to  be included in the job     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 3     Quick Tour    The design codes may be US  British or Indian     The default unit type may be English or SI  This denotes the units  in which the actual calculation will be performed  The reports etc   of course will be shown as per the users    choice of force and  displacement units     For this Quick Tour example  enter the job name Jobl in the New  Job Name edit box  In the Job Type drop down menu  select the  Isolated job type  Under the Supports In This Job category  check    to ensure that the All Supports radio button is activated by default     In this Create a New Job form we have another group called  Loading  Using this page we could have several jobs of the same  type  e g  Isolated footing  having different design load cases     We will take all the loadings for this job  Click the  gt  button to  move all the load cases over to the Selected Load Cases list on the  bottom of the page  Click the Create 
175. lows you to change load  cases by selecting from a list of load cases available in the active  project  To change load cases  simply select the load case you wish  to change to from the drop down list box  If no load cases have  been created for a project  the drop down list box will be empty     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 226   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 10 1 7    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Tools Toolbar    Tools toolbar allows you to move and generate geometry and set  column pedestal dimensions     A Lill i  Tools toolbar has following icons    e Move Selected Entities   e Translational Repeat   e Set Column Pedestal dimension  e Mat foundation wizard    Move Selected Entities    The Move Selected Entities command allows you to move selected  entities like support positions  beams and piles  After selecting the  entities to be moved click on the Move Selected Entities button   program will bring a dialog box where you need to input  incremental X Y Z distance     Move selected entities by    x          Unit   in v   Deltax    o     Delta Y    100    Deltaz   0    o_o    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 227    Translational Repeat    The Translational Repeat icon opens a dialog box that allows you  to duplicate objects in a model  The command works similar to a  copy command  except multiple copies of an object can be made at  atime  In addition  objects may be l
176. lt    Selecting Yes in this field will save the grid to be used in future  projects     Generate    The Generate Grid command button creates the specified grid in  the Graphics Window     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 23  Edit Grid Line s     The table below allows you to edit the grid lines of a grid  You can  edit the grid lines by changing the values in the table or by using  the command buttons     Insert After    The Insert After command button inserts a grid line after the row  selected in the grid line table  The value of that grid line will be  automatically calculated by interpolating the values above and  below that line     Insert Before    The Insert Before command button inserts a grid line before the  row selected in the grid line table  The value of that grid line will  be automatically calculated by interpolating the values above and  below that line     Delete    The Delete command button deletes the selected row in the grid  line table   Radial Grid    The Radial grid allows you to create a circular grid        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 24   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment          Inner Radius   Outer Radius   Division along circumfer   Division along radius                                        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 25  Grid Origin    The Grid Origin group box allows you
177. m    RangaRakes    3 24 Entering Octagonal footing design parameters  3 22 Conclusion    Section 4 STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 1  4 2  4 3  4 4    4 5    4 6    Introduction    STAAD  foundation Screen Organization  The Navigator Control    Global Data    441 The Project Info Page    4 4 1 1  4 4 1 2    General Info  Review History    442 The Foundation Plan Page    4 4 2 1  4 4 2 2  4 4 2 3    Grid Setup  Column Positions  Column Dimensions    4 4 3 The Loads and Factors Page    4 4 3 1  4 4 3 2  4 4 3 3  4 4 3 4  4 4 3 5  4 4 3 6  4 4 3 7  4 4 3 8  4 4 3 9    Create New Load Case   Add a Column Reaction Load   Add a Point Load  for Mat only    Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only   Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only   Add a Line Load  for Mat only    Add a Uniform Load  member load    Add a Concentrated Load  member load   Add a Trapezoidal Load  member load     4 4 3 10 Load Assignment Methods  4 4 3 11 Load Combination  4 4 3 12 Remove Load Case  4 4 3 13 Safety Factor    Job Setup    4 5 1 Create a New Job  4 5 2 Edit Current Job    Local Data    4 6 1 Isolated Footing    4 6 1 1  4 6 1 2  4 6 1 3  4 6 1 3  4 6 2 Pile Cap  4 6 2 1  4 6 2 2  4 6 2 3  4 6 2 4    Concrete and Rebar  Cover and Soil  Footing Geometry  Design    Pile Layout  Predefined   Pile Layout  Parametric   Design Parameters  Design    4 6 2 4 1 Layout Drawing  4 6 2 4 2 Detail Drawing  4 6 3 Mat Foundation    4 6 3 1  4 6 3 2    Default analysis properties  Physical Beam Table 
178. m deflection  at the end points   and at a few intermediate points  as shown by the X   s in the figure   The more points you have  the more accurately you can model the  deflected shape  On the other hand  you would not want hundreds  of points either  since it would make your structure too cumbersome  to analyze  You need to exercise judgment in selecting the number  of elements you use to model a slab  enough to accurately model  the behavior of the slab under load  but not so many as to make the  model difficult to work with     Another situation in which you would need more than one plate  element to model a slab would be when you want to know the  stresses in a slab caused by some type of point loading  You would  want to have quite a few elements in the vicinity of where the point  loading occurs in order to determine the stress distribution in the  slab caused by the concentrated load     As a result  rather than using just a single element or a few  elements  a series or matrix of finite elements is often needed to  model the behavior of a wall or slab  This series of elements is  commonly referred to as a mesh  Once you have created a mesh   incorporated it into a model  and used it as a basis for further  developing the model  it can be difficult to go back later and    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 5    change the size  i e  the    density     of the mesh  Here are some  suggestions that may help you determine the mesh siz
179. m elements of the foundation  This  information is then used in the design stage of the program  to     Establish the required top and bottom flexural reinforcing  in two orthogonal directions  check punching shear capacity  at column locations     The flexural design is done in accordance with Chapter 10  of the Code  The reinforcement areas are computed for a  notional band one unit of length wide     The program allows the designer  as an option  to use the  Wood Armer equations for reinforcement calculations  as  follows     Mx  My  and Mxy are fetched or calculated  as described  above  They are used to compute the values of design  moments  Mxd and Myd     For top reinforcement  the program computes     Mx    Mx   abs Mxy   Myl   My   abs Mxy   Mx2   Mx   abs Mxy   My   My2   My   abs Mxy    Mx     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 25    If both Mx1 and Myl are positive  Mxd   Mxl and Myd   Myl   If both Mx1 and My  are negative  Mxd   0 and Myd   0    If Mxl is negative and My1 positive  Mxd   0 and Myd   My2   If Myl is negative and Mxl positive  Mxd   Mx2 and Myd   0     For bottom reinforcement     Mx    Mx   abs Mxy   Myl   My   abs Mxy   Mx2   Mx   abs Mxy    My   My2   My   abs Mxy      Mx     If both Mx1 and Myl are positive  Mxd   0 and Myd   0    If both Mx1 and Myl are negative  Mxd   Mxl and Myd   Myl   If Mxl is negative and My1 positive  Mxd   Mx2 and Myd   0   If Myl is negative and Mxl positive  Mxd   0 and Myd   My2
180. mes     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    6 34   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems       Mat Capacity Check          a  eo  ki z   Fe se  ksi     m Covers   Top cover Bo i in z   Bottom cover Boo fin  gt      m Rebar    Bar size   4     Spacing fi2 fin       Choose Slab Face    Longitudinal Top dst      A Plot Capacity Diagram    Plot Moment Diagram      Plot Failure Diagram                      Mat capacity check form    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 35  Start Page e  Geometry Detail Drawing Layout Drawing Calculation Sheet Strip Footing Graph b Data Input Pane ax       Moment  Capacity  kip ft ft   30 692  O    30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692  30 692                  z      Mat Capacity Check F                         Grades   Fy 60 ksi xj   Fe ne ed         Covers   Top cover 3 in Zl   Bottom cover  3 in z   Rebar   Bar size 4     Spacing 12 in z    Choose Slab Face    Longitudinal Top x                Plot Capacity Diagram    Piot Moment Diagram    Piot Failure Diagram       Moment Capacity diagram plot for    Longitudinal Top                                      4   Start Page  7 Geometry   Detail Drawing   Layout Drawing if Calculation Sheet p Strip Footing Graph   p DataInputPane RK  Moment TP             Capacity    Mat Capacity Check    kip ttett  a Grades      a Fy 60 
181. metry    Diameter  Df   Enter the minimum diameter which will be used in starting the    design and will be checked up to the maximum value until the  design reaches the safety limit     Height  Tf    Enter the minimum height which will be used in starting the design  and will be checked up to the maximum value until the design  reaches the safety limit    Pedestal Geometry    Diameter  Dp     Diameter of the pedestal   Thickness  Tp   Thickness of the pedestal   Vessel Geometry    Effective Diameter  Dve        The effective diameter is the diameter that will be used to calculate  the wind pressure on the vessel     Effective Height  Hve        The effective height is the effective height of the vessel that will be  used to calculate the wind pressure and the seismic effect on the  vessel     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 8   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment  5 2 2 Primary Load Page    Here you have to input the primary loads other than wind load and  seismic load           Unit  Vertical   kip Iv Base Shear  kip lv Base Moment   kip ft iv  Standard Loads  Vertical Base Shear Base Moment      Empty Condition  145 016 o o  rnea  152911 mooo p    TestCondton 0 f p  User Defined Load           0 0000 10 0000 10 0000    Unit    Select the input unit for vertical force  base shear and base moment  for this page only     Standard Loads   For vertical vessel the standard loaded conditions are Empty  condition  Opera
182. n is selected by  default  and then click the OK button  STAAD foundation will  create the mesh and display it in the graphics window        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 43    3 12 Specifying Slab Thickness    As this is a physical modeling system  slab thickness and soil  properties are automatically assigned to the slab with default  values  To change slab thickness click on the Slab Thickness leaf  under Analysis Properties group     B Analysis properties      gt  Slab thickness   5 Soil property   3 Pile spring    The Slab Thickness page will be displayed in the Data Area pane                 By default it will show default slab thickness  We can change this  thickness to our desired values  For our example  we will use  default values  There are two types of thickness which are analysis  thickness and design thickness  Analysis thickness will be used to  analyze the slab and design thickness will be used while designing  the slab  This is particularly important in modeling a pedestal   where you may want to use excess thickness for stiffness modeling  but want to use slab thickness for design    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 44   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 13 Defining Soil Properties    Like thickness  soil property is also automatically created assigned  with the slab  the only thing we need to do is to activate the flag   To change or activate soil property click on the Soil Property leaf 
183. n on a  portion of a report by clicking on the region you want to zoom in  on  Once you have zoomed in  the Zoom In button will become  grayed out  You may return to the original viewing distance by  clicking on the Zoom Out button     Zoom Out   The Zoom Out button allows you to zoom back out after zooming in  on a page of a report  The Zoom Out button is only active after  zooming in on a page of a report     Close    The Close button removes the print preview window     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 196   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Print Setup    The Print Setup menu command opens a standard Windows print  setup dialog box that allows you to configure printer settings     Ee E    m Printer    Name  HP LaserJet 551 551 MX PS Properties         Status  Ready   Type  HP Lasenet 5Si 5Si MX PS  Where   IP_64 95 194 41   Comment              Paper Orientation    Size   Letter         Portrait  Source   Automatically Select x  C Landscape    Network      Cancel                     Import    The Jmport menu command is used to begin a new project by  importing the support geometry and support reactions from a  STAAD Pro analysis  The ability to import analysis data from  other structural analysis software programs will be provided in a  future release of STAAD foundation     You can only import a STAAD Pro model that has been  successfully analyzed  because you will want to have the support  reactions availa
184. nce points for initial mat set up and load  information  and defining boundaries of the mat  or  Creating the foundation slab from scratch and inputting  loading information manually     Modeling of the foundation involves meshing of the slab to  generate grid of finite elements  As with any FEM project   the denser the grid  smaller elements   the more precise  results will be obtained  In addition to the slab  the raft may  include a number of beams between the column locations   Since the beams would normally be part of the foundation   the slab polygonal meshing algorithm accounts for the  presence of the beam and ensures that they become  continuously integral with the slab  New nodes are  purposely created on the centerline of the beam and the  beam is split between those points into a number of  segments     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    2 24   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    Once the mat is defined and all material soil properties are  input  the program may proceed with the analysis of the  structure  It is performed by the state of the art STAAD  Analysis Engine  Realistic soil response is achieved by  employing non linear  compression only  spring supports to  model subgrade reactions  Pile reactions  if present  are  proportional to linear displacements of the supported node  and include both compression and tension  uplift      The program calculates internal forces and deflections for  all slab and bea
185. ndation Member  5 Project Info   Sy General Information  E Review History   Sy Modeling View Options    gt  Scale setup options       4  Foundation Plan    gt  Linear Grid Setup   Sg Radial Grid Setup  E Column Position  E Column Dimension      Sy Loads  amp  Factors   Sy Create New Load Case   Sy Add a Column Reaction Load   Sy Add a Point Load  for Mat only    SS Add a Line Load  for Mat only    Sy Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only    SS Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only       Add Member Load  gp Add Uniform Load  Sp Add Concentrated Load   Sy Add Trapezoidal Load   5g Safety Factor Table  E Create New Load Combination   5  Remove Load Case      Sy Job Setup   5  Create a New Job    Edit Current Job   55 Delete Job    The Main Navigator pane handles the program flow and display of  forms  tables  dialog boxes etc  for entering your project data  It is  organized in a logical order  allowing you to complete a project by  working from the top to the bottom     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 7    It s primarily a tree control where the whole tree is divided in  several groups  The basic division is Global and Local data   Information which will be used all through the project is called  global data  Column positions  column dimension and loading are  global data     Data related to specific type of job like Isolated footing are known  as local data  Design parameters  footing geometry are examples of  local data    
186. nforced Concrete Structure    by Punmia Jain Jain  Example  25 1     Problem    Design an isolated footing with the given data  Load Fy   600 KN   fc   15 MPa  fy   250 MPa  Column Dimension   500 mm x 500  mm  and Bearing Capacity of Soil   120 KN m                       600 KN          350 mm       2 2400 mm  3  3        500 p  erl _l_  L  2400 mm          RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 8   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Solution    60  Approximate area of footing required          m     5m  120    Assuming 2 4 mx 2 4 mx 0 35 m footing dimension   Weight of footing   2 4 x 2 4 x 0 35 x 25 KN   50 4 KN    Therefore  total load on the footing    600 50 4  KN   650 4 KN      650 4 3  Maximum pressure                KN m  24x24      112 92 KN m   lt 120 KN m   Hence safe       600x1 5 5 2  Ultimate pressure                KN m    156 25 KN m    24X24      pe   0 95 x 0 95  Bending moment at critical section  M    56 25 x 2 4 x m         169 21875 KN m    Assuming 50 mm clear cover and 12 mm bar  effective depth  de    350 50 0 5 x 12  mm   294 mm    700    Ku max aa ae   gt  sae  1100   0 87 fy      0 53    Ramax   0 36 x fe x Ky max X  1  0 42 Ky max    2 225    Mujim   Ry max X B x de      461 568 x 10   N mm    461 568 KN m  gt  M   Hence safe     tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 9  Area of Steel Required    Area of steel required along length           fe 4 6MU   As
187. ng      Whenever we add any wrong footing or unnecessary footing we  can remove it by clicking the left one i e  Undo in rectangle     2  Deletion of Footing      Suppose a footing has deleted but it is required to be there in  its    original position  In this situation one can implement the feature  Redo i e  the right one in the mentioned recta    tamilnavarasam com    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems   6 31    3  Addition of Load Case         Just added new load cases can be removed by clicking on Undo  if it becomes unnecessary     4  Deletion of Load Case         If any deleted load case become necessary to be inserted which  is just deleted  one can solve that problem by click on Redo     5  Addition of Load Item         Just added load items can be easily deleted by clicking on Undo  if it is not needed     6  Deletion of Load Item         Deleted load item can be needed sometimes  in that moment we  can resolve the problem on clicking on Redo     7  Create job      Using this option we can create a new job and the new job can  be deleted by clicking on Undo     8  Delete job      We have implemented the Redo feature over here to regain the  deleted job that is required to be there     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 32   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Mat Slab Capacity Check     Design parameters form for mat slab design has a new input  now which will instruct program to design slab without  consid
188. ng    Unit    Fixed    Fixed    Fixed    Increament    Increament          in v  No v  No v  No v    1    1    tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 30   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Length of the right overhang from the central line of the right pier   Choose    Yes    from the combo box right next to it if you wish to  make it fix else    No    if you wish to allow it to increase by the  design engine     Left Overhang  Length of the left overhang from the central line of the left pier   Choose    Yes    from the combo box right next to it if you wish to    make it fix else    No    if you wish to allow it to increase by the  design engine     Width  Minimum width of the footing  Choose    Yes    from the combo box    right next to it if you wish to make it fix else    No    if you wish to  allow it to increase by the design engine     Width  Max     The maximum width allowed up to which it will be incremented by  the design engine     Thickness  Minimum thickness of the footing     Thickness  Max        The maximum thickness allowed up to which it will be incremented  by the design engine  The rate increment will have to be given on  the right    Increment    input field     Length  Max     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   5 31    The maximum total length allowed up to which it will be  incremented by the design engine  The rate increment will have to  be given 
189. ng  you to view what the active report will look like when printed out     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 194   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment             Rie     Pap          The following command buttons are available in the Print Preview    window   e Print  e Next Page    e Prev  Page  e Two Page  e Zoom In   e Zoom Out  e Close     Print    The Print button opens a standard Windows print dialog box and  allows you to print the active project report     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 195    Next Page    The Next Page button displays the next page in a report  If there is  only one page in a report or you are at the last page in a report  the  button will be grayed out     Prev  Page    The Prev  Page button displays the previous page in a report  If  you are at the first page in a report  the button will be grayed out     Two Page    The Two Page button allows you to display two pages of a report  on the screen at a time  Once you are in two page mode  the text on  the button will change to    One Page     If you click on the button  again  one page will be displayed on the screen at a time and the  text on the button will change back to    Two Page        Zoom In    The Zoom In button allows you to zoom in closer on a page of a  report  After you click on the Zoom In button  your mouse cursor  will change to a magnifying glass  You may then zoom i
190. ng No Footing Length   Footing Width Thickness   in   in   in        41 00 in 41 00 in    Summary Table  JOb1    Footing No Main Steel Secondary Steel Pedestal Main Steel Pedestal Secondary Stee     6   18 13 in cic  6   12 08 in cic Not Found Not Found          RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 72   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 6 2    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Pile Cap    Pile Cap job type has a unique group for local data called Pile Cap  Job  The Pile Cap Job group allows you to specify pile  arrangement for each pile cap and design parameters and is only  active for pile cap job types     The Pile Cap Job group contains the following elements     e Pile Layout  Predefined   e Pile Layout  Parametric   e Design Parameters   e Design      Pile Cap Job    gt  Pile Layout Predefined     Pile Layout Parametric    5 Design Parameters  E Design    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 73  4 6 2 1 Pile Layout  Predefined     5  Pile Cap Job    gt  Pile Layout Parametric     Design Parameters    amp  Design    Clicking on Pile Layout  Predefined  leaf opens a form in the Data  Area pane that allows you to specify pile arrangement for a pile  cap  Predefined page has a set of predefined pile layout and  program can automatically choose the best possible pile  arrangement     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes       STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    4 74   Section 4    
191. ng Setup  Center x   o  Center Y   lo  Center Z    Radius   an  Number Of Sides   8       Orientation Angle   0      Region preview       The form generates any sided regular shaped polygon  To generate  the polygon you need to input    Center of the polygon    Specify X Y Z coordinate of polygon center    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 112   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Radius    Circular radius of the polygon where radius is the distance  measured between center and each vertex of the polygon     Number of sides    Number of polygon sides  For example enter 8 for an octagonal  shaped polygon     Orientation Angle    This is the rotation angle of the polygon  Change the angle to get  your desired orientation     Generate    It will generate the polygon and will display in Region Preview  window  Please note  the generation will be in XZ plane     Add Region    Add region will add the generated polygon to the main view area    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 113  4 6 3 4 2 Meshing Setup    Meshing setup option allows you to add created region to the  current job and then to generate mesh  To add a region to the  current job  first select that region in the graphics  Selected region  will be highlighted        There are three options to add a region  It can be added as a  boundary or as a hole or as a control region to an already created  boundar
192. ng X field allows you to specify the spacing between grid  lines along the X axis     Spacing Z    The Spacing Z field allows you to specify the spacing between grid  lines along the Z axis     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 21    Number of Lines around Origin   The Number of Lines around Origin group box allows you to  specify the number of grid lines to the left  right  top  and bottom  of the grid origin     Left    The Left field allows you to specify the number of grid lines to the  left of the grid origin     Right    The Right field allows you to specify the number of grid lines to the  right of the grid origin     Top    The Top field allows you to specify the number of grid lines above  the grid origin     Bottom    The Bottom field allows you to specify the number of grid lines  below the grid origin     Grid Direction   The Grid Direction group box allows you to specify in what  direction you would like to edit the grid using the table and  commands available below     Direction X    The Direction X option allows you to edit the grid lines along the  X axis     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 22   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Direction Z    The Direction Z option allows you to edit the grid lines along the  Z axis     Show Grid    The Show Grid field toggles the display of the grid in the Graphics  Window     Save As Defau
193. nits to use for the load  Next  input the load value  with proper sign  Please note  a positive Y value represents load  acting upward  Now  select the Direction  Local X  Local Y  Local  Z  Global X  Global Y  or Global Z  in which the load will act  upon  If load is acting at the middle of the beam you don   t need to  input position parameter  Please note that position here is in local  coordinates  Finally  click on Add Load to accept the load     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 44   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 4 3 9    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Add Trapezoidal Load  member load     Clicking on the Add Trapezoidal Load leaf opens a form in data  area pane that allows you to create a trapezoidal load on physical  beams        To create trapezoidal load acting on a beam  first select the Load  and Length Units to use for the load  Next  input the load values  with proper sign at start and end  Now  select the Direction  Local  X  Local Y  Local Z  Global X  Global Y  or Global Z  in which the  load will act upon  Now input start and end distance of the load   Please note  distances here are in local coordinates  Finally  click  on Add Load to accept the load     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 45    4 4 3 10 Load assignment methods    The Assignment Method utility allows you to choose the method of  assignment and contains the following methods and commands     e As
194. nment    4 8 2 3 Design    Next click on    Design     The design progress report will be  generated in the    Design Progress Report    window and a summery  of design resulted will be displayed in the    Octagonal footing  Design Summary    tab of the    Output    window     Processing Footing 1             DE AE PE DE DE DE PE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE DE OE DE DE DE DE DE OE OD    Calculating footing dimension   Processing Load Case 1   Calculated minimum diameter 6 250 ft   Calculated overturning ratio  1 000  Processing shear check   Processing Load Case 1   Calculated Design Shear 0 095 kip  Calculated required thickness 36 000 inch  Processing reinforcement design  Processing Load Case 1   Calculated required reinforcement 0 061 sq  inch  Design completed       M 4  gt      Design Progress Report Octagonal footing Design Summary    Footing  Diameter    zasi Stability Ratio Reqd  Reinforcement    m       HA Design Progress Report A Octagonal footing Design Summary    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 187    A detailed calculation sheet will be generated in the    Calculation  Sheet    tab     Octagonal Foundation Design 1    Octagonal Foundation 1    Unit   in  Height   36 000  Diameter   36 000    Unit  in  Minimum Footing Diameter   72 000  Maximum Footing Diameter   300 000  Minimum Footing Depth   36 000  Maximum Footing Depth   72 000    Minimum Stability Ratio   1 500  Soil Depth   0 000 f
195. nt diagram we may decide whether  to go on with this arrangement or not  If we decide not to go on  with the arrangement we would again click on Calculate    Otherwise we click on the Select Arrangement button to select the  arrangement     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 78   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 18 Entering Pile Cap Design Parameters    After the pile arrangement is selected  the design for the pile cap is  begun  The form for input of design parameters is invoked by  clicking the Design Parameters leaf under    Pile Cap Job    group in  main navigator pane        4 Pile Cap Job    gt  Pile Layout Predefined     _y Pile Layout Parametric    3 Design Parameters    Fy Design    The Design Parameters page will be displayed in the Data Area    pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 79             Let us accept the default parameters provided by the program   Check to make sure that the default values displayed on the Design  Parameters form in your program match those shown in the figure  above     Strength of Concrete  4 ksi  Yield Strength of Steel  60 ksi  Minimum Bar Size  6  Maximum Bar Size  11   Side cover  Cs   4 in   Bottom Cover  Cb   3 in   Pile in Pile Cap  Cp   4 in   Initial thickness  18 in    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 80   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 19 Performing Pile Cap Design and Viewing  Results    Now that the design parame
196. number of piles   By default program will create symmetric pile arrangement from the    above input  It will attempt to place equal number of piles to all  layers  It will create an additional layer for the remainder of piles     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 103    User can change the default setup by editing the layers table as  shown below     Apply    Click on apply button to transfer pile layout to graphics and add to  the current mat foundation job  Please do remember to input    appropriate origin coordinates to move the whole pile group to the  right position        Circular pile arrangement parametric      Unit  in he    Number of Piles    37    Number of circular layers   4          Pile spacing  36       Origin X   0       Origin Y   0                       Origin Z       Apy    Preview       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 104   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 6 3 4    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Mesh generation    As Mat foundation module is based on FEA analysis  program  needs to generate plate elements  STAAD  foundation has automatic  mesh generation tools and it can generate both quadrilateral and  triangular mesh for any shape and size     It has two categories    1  Add meshing region  2  Meshing setup    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 105  4 6 3 41 Add meshing region    This section is used to create mes
197. o perform  various tasks     Additional STAAD foundation learning resources are available at  Bentley Systems  Inc  web site at http   www bentley com en   US Products STAAD foundation      Finally  we strongly encourage you to take advantage of Bentley s  technical support service  Our support staff is most eager and  willing to help you learn to use the program correctly    You may contact our STAAD foundation technical support staff by  sending e mail to the following address    support  reiusa com    Write down your guestions and attach your STAAD foundation  project file  if you think it would be helpful  the  STAAD foundation project file is appended with the extension AFS      the current input file name always appears in the title bar at the  top of your STAAD foundation program window   Most technical  support e mails are answered the same day they are received   Thank you for purchasing STAAD foundation  We hope you enjoy  using the program and hope that it adds value and efficiency to  your engineering endeavors  If you have any comments regarding  the program  or suggestions on how it could be improved to better  serve your needs  we would very much like to hear from you     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 99    wo Oo  gt     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    ed    STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment       Section 4  General Foundation    This section includes discussion on the following topics     e Introduct
198. o provide input data  The Main navigator is arranged from  top to bottom in a logical design sequence  If you start at the top  tree leaf and work your way down  you will be able to input all the  data needed to perform a successful design        Note  STAAD foundation consists of two sets of data  global  and local  Global data such as column reactions and column  positions is shared throughout a project among both similar and  different jobs  Local data such as design parameters is used  only within a specific job type  For example  an Isolated  Footing job type has local data within the design parameters  group                 The middle pane  2   located to the immediate right of the Main  Navigator pane  is called the Main View  It has multiple tabs for  graphical display of the model  layout drawing  detail drawing and  calculation sheet  For strip footing design it will have an  additional tab to display Shear Force and Bending Moment graphs  for design load cases     The right most pane  3  is called the Data Area  It also has 2 tabs   One for loading and the other one to contain the forms that provide  input data or display output     The bottom pane  4  is called Output Area  It will list design  progress while designing or analyzing a foundation and will display  output tables like    Output Summary Table    for Isolated  pile cap   strip footing design and analysis output tables like displacement   plate stress etc  for mat foundation     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam
199. o used for design    Bar Type   Types of bar used for the design e g  Imperial or Metric   Cover   Value of clear cover with proper unit    Fc    Strength of concrete   Fy  Strength of steel     Minimum Bar Dia       Minimum diameter of bar to use for design     Maximum Bar Dia       Maximum diameter of bar to use for design     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    5 2 8 Foundation Type Page       Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 23    As discussed earlier you have three options for foundation type   They are octagonal footing on soil  sguare pile cap and octagonal  pile cap  For the first one i e  octagonal footing on soil you have to    use soil foundation as shown below     Foundation Type  Unit  Force  Pile Data  Lateral  Uplift  Vertical  Dia  Edge  Pile in Pilecap      Soil Foundation       Length    Number of Rows    Row Spacing    Number of Columns    Column Spacing    OPilecap Foundation    tamilnavarasam com    5 24   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    5 2 9    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Finish and Design    Now click on    Finish     You will see a Vessel job is added to the  tree view in the left side    Main Navigator    pane  Now click on     Design     The design progress can be seen in the    Output Window     situated below  And a detailed calculation sheet will come in the     Calculation Sheet    tab     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   5 25 
200. o view  the detailed drawing of each footing designed     Detailed drawing shows detailed reinforcement and sectional  drawing of one footing at once  Select the current footing from drop    down list at the top called Footing No  The drawing will be  automatically refreshed with selection changed     PileCap   Plan     8   17 000 in    PileCap   Reinforcement Section       Like layout drawing  this can be saved in different formats  including DWG and DXF by clicking on Save Drawing As button     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 93    4 6 3    Mat Foundation    Mat foundation local data group is called Mat foundation Job  The  Mat foundation Job group allows you to create mat boundary   meshing and specify analysis and design parameters to analyze and  design mat slab  Mat module uses finite element analysis technigue  for accurate results         4 Mat foundation Job   5  Default analysis properties   35 Physical beam table     Pile Layout   4 Pile position table   5  Rectangular pile arrangement wizard  parametric     amp  Circular pile arrangement wizard  parametric       Mesh generation   4 Add meshing regions    Using polyline   G Add a rectangular region   5 Add a circular region    amp  Regular polygon    amp  amp  Meshing setup  5  Analysis properties     Slab thickness    Soil property    amp  Pile spring      Mat slab design options   5 Analyze    amp  Output View Options   5  Moment envelope gen
201. ock Higher Zone       Current Zone     HR Zone 3       X Select Nodes          Choose Slab face    Reinforcement zoning is done for one face at a time  So  this step  needs to be repeated four times to detail all faces and direction   Select the current slab face from drop down list     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 152   Section 4   STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Preferred Zone Reinforcement Count    Use this edit box to tell the program how many different sizes of  reinforcing steel bars  rebar  you want the program to allow in the  slab design  The program divides the slab into the number of zones  you designate  Each zone will contain only one size of reinforcing  steel     Create Zone    Click this button to create the number of reinforcing zones  specified by the value entered in the No  of Zones edit box  The  following figure shows how the display might appear when three  zones are created        A colored dot in the center of each element of the mesh indicates  the reinforcing zone that the element belongs to     Create Block    Click on this button to divide the slab into block shaped areas   based on the reinforcement zones generated by the Create    tamilnavarasam com       Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 153    Reinforcing Zones command  These rectangular areas are created  to allow a practical layout of the various sizes of reinforcing steel     D  o    RangaRakes tam
202. of the footing        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 79    Delete Selected Rows    The Delete Selected Rows button allows you to delete a row in the  table of pile cap coordinates when using the Manual Arrangement  mode  To delete a row  select the row you would like to delete  from the table and then click on Delete Selected Rows     Show Pile Reactions    The Show Pile Reactions button opens a table displaying the  reaction on each pile     E Pile Reaction Table for Support No  1  X                                                 Select Arrangement    The Select Arrangement button allows you to select the current pile  arrangement for the design of the pile cap  If you do not want to  use the current pile arrangement  recalculate the arrangement or  input the pile coordinates again manually     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 80  Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 2 2    Pile Layout  Parametric     Clicking on Pile Layout  Parametric  leaf opens a form in the Data  Area pane that allows you to specify pile arrangement for a pile  cap  Parametric page allows you to input rectangular and circular  pile arrangement  If circular arrangement is chosen  the program  will design that pile cap as Octagonal Pile Cap           Pile Arrangement Parametric     Support for Pile Arrangement 1  v  Unit  Force  kip mM Length  in      Pile Data  Later
203. ollowing pile properties  capacity   bearing  uplift  and lateral   diameter  spacing  and edge  distance  Based on these parameters  the program  determines the reguired pile configuration as well as plan  dimensions of the footing from the condition  that the force  transferred to any pile should not exceed its capacity  For a  general case of vertical and horizontal forces  and bending  moments acting on the cap  that stipulation is equivalent to  satisfying the following two equations     Hpile  gt   Happ    N  Vpile  gt   Vappl   N   Mxappl   Ry   Ixg   Myapp    Rx   Iyg    tamilnavarasam com    Section 2     Theoretical Basis   2 21    Where   Hpile   single pile horizontal capacity  Vpile   single pile vertical capacity    Happ    total horizontal load applied   Vapp   total vertical load applied   N   total number of piles in footing  Mxappl   applied bending moment about X axis  Myapp    applied bending moment about Y axis    Rx   distance from Y axis to the farthest pile  Ry   distance from X axis to the farthest pile  Ixg   pile group moment of inertia about X axis  Iyg   pile group moment of inertia about Y axis       Note  X and Y axes above are centroidal axes of the    pile group  Ixg and Iyg are calculated treating each pile  as a unit  and are egual X 1 y      and 20x    respectively        The program includes a library of possible pile layouts for  quantities from   to 25 piles  Based on the user input  the  program recommends the most economical  least num
204. ombination and can save it using an INI  file  This file exits in the program installation directory as     ACILOAD INT     This saved load combination will be application  specific i e  they are independent of file saving  Following figure  shows the load combination page     Allowable Load Combination     Update Table         gt                                    0 00    0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00     0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00  0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00      gt    Ultimate Load Combination     Update Table     Delete         gt                             4             The first column indicates the index of the load combination  The  second row has a check  Check on the check boxes of the  combination which you want to use  The cell with zero values  appears in gray color where as with values other than zero it  appears in sky color     Update Table    Initially the page shows all the load combination saved in the INI  file  You can add new load combination simply by adding factors in  the last row  Check on the check box in the second row to use the  load combination  If you save a file with those load combination  then the load combination will be only saved to that file but not in    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 20   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    INI file  To save the load combination in the INI file you need to  click on    Update Table     You can also manually change the INI  file     Delete  To del
205. on the right    Increment    input field     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    5 3 3    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 32   Section 4      STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Primary Load Page    Here you have to input the primary loads other than wind load and    seismic load     Axial load  Force Unit    Empty Load  Operating Load    Miscellaneous Axial Load    Thermal Load    Bundle Pull Force  Load distribution      Shell End Percent           Moment    kip M Moment Unit   0  Empty Moment   0  Operating Moment   0  7  Longitudinal Miscellaneous Moment  0 Transverse Miscellaneous Moment  40 of  Channel End Percent       60 oy    Here the loads are grouped into two types  Axial Load and Moment     Axial Load    Select the unit for Axial load from the combo box  Five types of  axial forces are used for input  They are Empty Load  Operating  Load  Miscellaneous Axial Force  Thermal Load and Bundle Pull    Force     Moment    Select the unit for Moment from the combo box  Four types of    moments are used for input  They are Empty Moment  Operating    Moment  Longitudinal Miscellaneous Moment and Transverse    Miscellaneous Moment     Load Distribution       tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 33    Give the load distribution percentage for    Shell End    and     Channel End        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    5 34   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical En
206. oordinates of the  quadrilateral figure  x1  x2  x3  x4  zl  z2  z3  z4   Finally  click on  OK to accept the load     Note  The Y Coordinate must correspond to the elevation of the  foundation supports     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 37    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 38   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 4 3 5 Adda Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only     Clicking on the Add Circular Load leaf opens a form in data pane  area that allows you to create a Circular Load  Quadrilateral Loads  are plate pressure load and only applicable to mat foundations        a a om     J     J       ils       Value of the pressure acting on a circular area on mat  Enter a  ve  value if the pressure is vertically downward    o  gt          RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 39    STAAD foundation does not actually create a true circular  boundary for a Circular Load  Instead  STAAD foundation  simulates a circle through the use of pie shaped wedges as shown in  the figure below           To create a Circular Load  first select the Dimension and Pressure  Units to use for the load  Then input the magnitude of the load in  the Pressure field  Next  input the X and Z coordinates of the  center of the circle in the Center X and Center Z fields  Now input  the length of the radius of the circle in the Radius fiel
207. orming a foundation design  Each project may contain  multiple jobs so that you can evaluate different design scenarios for  a given set of physical conditions     Update STAAD Database    This utility is only useful if the global geometry of the foundation  project was originally imported from STAAD Pro  If the  STAAD Pro results get changed after the foundation project is  created  this utility allows user to update current project   s input  database with the changed STAAD Pro output  Clicking on this  menu item will open a file open dialog box where you need to  choose the original file which was imported     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 223  4 10 1 4 Save Picture Toolbar    aa    This icon allows you to save current screen to bitmap picture file     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 224   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 10 1 5 Change Job Toolbar    Mat_Examp08 Z    The Change Job drop down list box allows you to select a job from  a list of jobs you have created for the active project  To change  jobs  simply select the job you wish to change to from the drop   down list box  If no jobs have been created for a project  the drop   down list box will be empty     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 225  4 10 1 6 Change Current Load Case Toolbar    1  1 4DL   1 7L       The Change Load drop down list box al
208. ory         4 Project Info  E General Information   5 Scale setup options    Clicking on Review History leaf opens a review history form in  Data Area pane that allows you to keep track of the progress of a  project                                                              One   Gan       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 14   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    The Review History form allows you to input a Date  Job Name   Checked By Name  and Comments for each revision of a project   Each new revision is given a unique ID Number  starting from 1     To add a revision  first input the information for Date  Job Name   and Checked By  Then input any comments about the revision in the  Comments field  Finally  click on the Save button to keep the  changes you have made  To view the Comments for a given  revision  select the revision from the table     The Review History form contains the following three commands    buttons   e Save  e Delete    e Delete All     Save    The Save button saves any changes made to the revision table and  comments field     Delete    The Delete button removes the currently selected revision from the  revision table     Delete All    The Delete All button removes all revisions from the revision table     Note  Deleting a revision from the revision table also deletes the  Comments that were stored with the deleted revision        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD found
209. pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 17    Data Input Pane 000000          Scale setup    Result Scales    Displacement    0 033 B    Loading Scales    Point Load     5 EH    Point Moment   100 FE              DistibutedLoad   100 FE          Pressure Load   100 g    Modeling Scales  Footing Width  50 E    Pile Length   100 ig       Now increase the value for Point Load in order to make the nodal  loads more visible  Any changes to the values in the Scales tab will  become effective immediately in view pane     We will now repeat the process we just went through to create a  second Load Case  First click on the New Load Case leaf under the  Loads  amp  Factors group in Main Navigator pane  Next  input    Live  Load    for the Load Title and select No for self weight and then  click on Add Load  Now click on the Add a Column Reaction  leaf  input a value of 10 for Fz and click on Add Load  Finally   select Assign To View and click on Assign     If you have multiple load cases and want to combine them  you can  use the Load Combination feature  To bring up the Load  Combination feature  click on the Create New Load Combination  leaf under the Loads  amp  Factors group in Main navigator pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 18   Section 3     Quick Tour    To define serviceability and design factors for each load case in a  project  you may use the Safety Factor Table  To bring up the 
210. pported by soil each plate node of the mat region will have  one soil spring attached to it     Reaction tab shows support reactions for current job for current  load case only  Please select your desired load case from Select  Current Load icon in toolbar     The table shows reactions for all six degree of freedom for all  nodes  Clicking on any row will highlight the corresponding node    in graphics        0 4219324                      0 8148363           0 7834994       0 7491724       0 713971       0 6823493       0 6589678         0 6475495       Slolslololsiaia       0 6508462    ae    o       0 6707619         S0 000500 oo           0 7084866             o 7645538       S0 0000000 oo 9 0    0 838753           sisis    S0 00000 oo 05  o o          S0 0000 0 0 00 00 9 0       olololo          t    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 133  4 6 5 5  Support  Reaction Summary      Design Progress Report    Displacement 4 Disp Summary Reaction    Reaction Summary 4 Contact Are     Click on the Reaction Summary tab to review support reaction  summary results  This option is available only if the mat is  supported on soil     Reaction summary table displays maximum and minimum reaction  forces for all directions among all load cases  Each row displays  either a maximum or minimum value of a particular DOF along with    node and load case number  Clicking on any row will highlight  corresponding node in the graphics                  
211. pth  12    Column Width  12    a OK Q Cancel    You can specify whether the column is rectangular or circular and  input column dimension  If you want to add a pedestal  click on the  option called    Consider Pedestal     It will change the input from  column type to pedestal type  For pedestal in addition to the plan  dimension you can specify pedestal height     Add Self Weight    This option allows user to add self weight to the selected or all load  cases  This self weight definition is only applicable for Mat  foundation as program will not add self weight of the mat slab by  default  For other types of footing like isolated or combined footing  program automatically adds self weight for all service load cases   Clicking on this button will open a dialog box where all load cases    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 208   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    in the project will be listed  Check Include check box to include  self weight to a load case  At the bottom of the dialog box there is a  control to check on off all load cases  Click on OK to  assign unassign self weight     Add Self Weight  x    STAAND  foundation Add Selfweight          1 4DL   4 7LL     75 1 4DL   1 7LL   1 7WL     lect All  tik    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 209  4 10 The Toolbars        Ala BBS     P   Mat Exmos    attocaaaarth    fe  1  1 40L   1 71     STAAD  foundation of
212. r AD    CR STAAD  Foundation Online Documentation    irtemet Explorer   SI Outlook Express       STAAD foundation will launch with the option to create a new  project for general foundation or plant foundation     STAAD  foundation    Create New Project  General Foundation    Plant Foundation    Open Existing Project    einen          RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    3 4   Section 3     Quick Tour    You may start a project from the File menu  You may start a New  file  Open an existing file or Import an analyzed file from             STAAD Pro   File   Edit View Tools Help   ae Open    Ctrl 0 1 Plant Setup  le Save Ctrl s  Kg Import  iuntitled afs    2EG1581MME MAT FDN rib afs  3C TempWat afs  4C  Tempitanki afs    Exit       To start a new project  pull down the File menu and select the New  menu command  Then select foundation type as General Setup   Program will add additional tabs in the main window to support  general foundation design setup as shown in the following figure                          tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 5    This introduces the multi pane window environment with tabbed  views of STAAD foundation  As seen in the figure above  a project  is divided into 4 separate panes     The left most pane  1  is called the Main Navigator  It contains the  tree by which user will navigate to the different pages within  STAAD  foundation  The different pages contain forms or grids  used t
213. r Cursor    The Select Physical Member Cursor icon allows you to select only  physical members with your mouse cursor  causing all other objects  to be ignored     Select Pile Cursor    The Select Pile Cursor icon allows you to select only piles with  your mouse cursor  causing all other objects to be ignored     Select Mat Boundary Cursor    The Select Mat Boundary Cursor icon allows you to select only mat  boundary with your mouse cursor  causing all other objects to be  ignored     Create a Column Position Clicking On Grid  Intersection Point    The Create a Column Position Clicking on Grid Intersection Point  icon allows you to place column positions on grid intersection  points using your mouse cursor  A grid is created using the Grid  Setup page under the Foundation Plan group     Create a Pile Position Clicking On Grid Intersection  Point    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 254   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    The Create a Pile Position Clicking on Grid Intersection Point  icon allows you to place pile positions on grid intersection points  using your mouse cursor  A grid is created using the Grid Setup  page under the Foundation Plan group     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 255    wo Oo  gt     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 256   Section 4      STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    wo  gt  
214. ral Load  e Add a Circular Pressure Load  e Add Member Load  o Add Uniform Load  o Add Concentrated oad  o Add Trapezoidal Load  e Safety Factor Table  e Create New Load Combination  e Remove Load Case    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 31  4 4 3 1 Create New Load Case         5  Loads  amp  Factors     5 Create New Load Case      gt  Add a Column Reaction Load    Clicking on the Loads  amp  Factors leaf or clicking on Create New  Load Case leaf will open Load Description form in data pane area        Load Title  Load Type      Copy Load  Load Case No    5 Self Weight    Add Self Weight       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 32   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    To create a new load case you need to input Load Title  it can be  any string     Load Type can be one of the followings    1  Primary  2  Service  3  Ultimate    A Primary load case will be used for both serviceability and  factored design  For primary load cases  both the serviceability and  design factors will automatically be set to 1  A Service load case  will be used only for serviceability checks to calculate footing  dimensions  An Ultimate load type will be used for shear checks  and reinforcement design     Copy Load option allows user to copy all load items from a  previously defined load case  By default  source load case is set as  None     Add Self Weight option is used to add 
215. rds will  be list of slab thickness properties  Left most cells of each row will  show the region identifier name as specified in Meshing Setup  operation     You can have different thickness for analysis and design  Analysis    thickness will be used for FEM analysis of mat foundation and  design thickness will be used to design the mat slab     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  4 120   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 4 2 Soil Property        Analysis properties   2 Slab thickness     P    D DEl      amp  Pile spring    Clicking on the Soil Property leaf opens a table in the Data Area  pane that allows you to change and assign soil properties for the  design of mat foundations     v  Use soil spring         As slab is added as a physical entity in STAAD foundation  default  soil property will be automatically created for each slab region  But  by default soil property will not be assigned to the region as the  mat foundation could be supported on piles only     If the soil spring is not assigned to the region  value for subgrade  modules will be shown in Red color  Click on the Include soil  spring check box to assign the soil property to the region  If  Include soil spring check box is checked  value for subgrade  modulus will be shown in blue color     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 121  4 6 4 3 Pile Spring         Analysis properties  E Slab thicknes
216. ree  Load Case 1  Load Case 1       The load case we just created will now appear in the list box in the  Data Area pane  We will now specify the loads imposed on our  foundation by the columns  To do this  click on the    Add a  column Reaction Load    leaf under Loads and Factors group     o  Loads  amp  Factors   5  Create New Load Case        i gcd a Column Reaction Load      Add a Point Load  for Mat only     S5 Add a Line Load  for Mat only    S5 Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only    ES Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only       Add Member Load    Bs  Add Uniform Load     amp  Add Concentrated Load    5 Add Trapezoidal Load    gt  Safety Factor Table  E Create New Load Combination   Sy Remove Load Case       Alternatively you can right click on    Load Case 1  Load Case 1     string in load description area and click on the Add a Column  Reaction Load menu     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 14   Section 3     Quick Tour      Add Point Load  Add Line Load  Add Circular Load  Add Rectangular Load  Add Member Load             KAN  D JUUUUU    nanan   5 000000             A form will appear allowing you to create a nodal load  Enter a  value of 5 in the Fx field  and a value of    5 in the Fy field  Then  click on the Add Load button to accept the load input     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 15       Note  Negative and positive values follow the sign conventions  of the axis 
217. rs   status bars and menus on and off        l Toolbars  gt     Status Bar    l Application Look  gt        The View Menu contains the following menu commands   e Toolbars    e Status Bar   e Application Look    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 201    Toolbars    The Toolbars menu command displays the option to switch on off  different toolbars and controls  If you click on customize button   the program opens a dialog box allowing you to customize the  toolbars     Standard Toolbar          Output  Caption Bar  Main Nevigator  Load Page  Task Pen  Dynamic Help       Customize       Status Bar    The Status Bar command toggles the display of the status bar on  and off  The Status Bar is positioned at the bottom of the   STAAD  foundation screen and displays a variety of helpful  information  depending on which part of the program you are using   and which command is currently active     When you hold your mouse cursor over a toolbar button  the left  side of the Status Bar displays an explanation on how to use the  command associated with that particular button  When you hold  your mouse cursor over a menu command  the left side of the Status  Bar displays an explanation of what that menu command does     Application Look    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 202   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    STAAD foundation offers 5 different application look to choo
218. rt                     Design Code  Default Unit Type   Support Assignment     Listed Supports                        Transfer both load cases to    Selected load cases    by clicking     button  Now click on    Create Job    button to create a new octagonal  footing job     Also note  the main view now shows octagonal shape for support  number 5     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour  3 93       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    3 94   Section 3     Quick Tour    3 24 Entering Octagonal footing design  parameters    Please note main navigator tree is now changed with octagonal  footing related controls  For octagonal footing jobs  a unique group  called Octagonal footing Job will be created in the main navigator    pane         Octagonal Footing Job     Design Parameters    gt  Design Parameters    gt  Footing Geometry    G Design    Click on Design Parameters leaf under    Design parameters    group  to change design parameters  For this example we will use default  values as shown below                             RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 95    Click on Footing Geometry leaf under    Design Parameters    group  to change values related to geometry  For this example we will use  default values as shown below        Now click on Design leaf to design the octagonal footing  After  design is completed a design summary table will be shown in  Output pane        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com 
219. rt and End points now have values   Click on    Insert a new cut line    button  A graph will be shown in    the view pane     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual  3 66   Section 3     Quick Tour    Cut slab by a line    Slab cut options      By drawing a line on slab         By specifying coordinates Unit   1  Starting Z    Interpolation Factor        Starting X    Ending x       f    Graph Scale Factor      Stress Type     MX        insert a new cut Li             E  Mat_Examp08  F Cot Line 11x           Increase graph scale factor to 10 and now the screen will look like  following     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 67          RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  3 68   Section 3     Quick Tour    Now click the button labeled Design Selected Line  A dialog box  labeled Design Report Along a Selected Line will be displayed     IM Design report along a cut line    Select Graph Type     Moment Envelope     Regd  Reinforcement Area             Moment Envelope   Wood and Armer C Design for Ultimate load type only  10 536  17 48 12 1  0 141 30 94 12 14 0 193  3141       L       ae 2                         Click on the Design button to calculate the required reinforcement  area for each element along the cut line     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Design report along a cut line    Select Graph Type       Moment Envelope    0 234       Read  Reinforcement Area    
220. s   G7 Soil property    Clicking on the Pile Spring leaf opens a table in the data area pane  that allows you to edit the pile spring constant values for all the  piles present in the current job     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 122    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    E  s  ol  el  Sa  a  a  B  a  5     B     Ta                               si    al          i    2 8                STAAD  foundation     User s Manual          The following pile support properties are available     Kx  Ky  Kz    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 123    Kx    The Kx field allows you to specify a spring constant K value for the  X Direction     Ky    The Ky field allows you to specify a spring constant K value for the  Y Direction     Kz    The Kz field allows you to specify a spring constant K value for the  Z Direction     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 124   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 6 5 Mat slab design options        3 Mat slab design options    gt  Analyze    Output View Options   5 Moment envelope generation      5  Design Parameters   5 Reinforcement Zoning    amp  Cut slab by a line    5 Calculation sheet    The Mat slab design options group allows you to perform an  analysis on a mat foundation  review output results and finally  design mat foundation  This group is only active for mat foundation  job types     The Mat slab d
221. s at the center of each  plate  This option won t display plate numbers if Show Plates is  switched off     Show Nodes  This option is used to display plate nodes as blobs  This option is    switched off by default  The color picker control next to it allows  user to choose a suitable color to draw plate nodes     Show Node Numbers  This option is used to display node numbers next to the plates  nodes  This option won t display node numbers if Show Nodes is  switched off     Show Boundary and Holes    This option is used to display boundary and holes created for mat  foundation     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    The Scales page allows you to control the scale at which  displacements  loads  and drawing entities like footings and piles  are displayed on the model  If the structure   s loads or deformed  shape are not clearly visible in the Graphics Window when the  options to display them are turned on  you may need to change the    scaling values     STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 240   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 10 1 10 Scale Setup Toolbar    The following commands are available    Scale setup  Result Scales    Displacement      Loading Scales    Point Load   75 H  Point Moment   100 a  Distributed Load   100     A  Pressure Load   100 a  Modeling Scales  Footing width 100 a  Pile Length 100 4  C  Set As Default    e Results Scales  e Loading Scales  e Modeling Scales  e Set As Default                                  
222. s soil bearing capacity  you need to increase mat dimension and run the analysis again   Base pressure for each node is calculated dividing the reaction of a  plate node by the tributary area of that node     Base Pressurd  Y    kip in2    0 002    B     E  a  E  E  a  m  B  E   E  Eo  m   Boaz  E   me       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 142   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    Show Beam Stress    This option is available only if the mat foundation includes physical  beams  After selecting show beam stress  Select Stress Type under  beam stress setup group will be enabled  Select any stress type to  view the contour along with a legend     Available beam stress types are    1  Axial stress   2  Bending Y stress  3  Bending Z stress  4  Combined stress    o    Show Legend  Use this option to switch on off legend display  Plot contour on deflected shape    Select this option to draw stress contour on the deflected shape        tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 143       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 144   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 6 6 Slab Design        Mat slab design options  E Analyze   sy Output View Options   55 Moment envelope generation     5 Design Parameters   5 Reinforcement Zoning    amp  Cut slab by a line    2 Calculation sheet       Slab Design for Mat foundation is 
223. se  from  Program uses Office 2003 look by default     Office 2000   Office XP   Office 2003   Visual Studio NET 2005  Windows XP    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 203  4 9 4 Tools Menu    The Tools menu contains commands for manipulating the structure  geometry  managing jobs  and adding self weight       Move selected entities  N Rectangular Mat wizard    7 Update STAAD Database    IE Add Self Weight       The Tools menu contains the following menu commands     e Move Selected Entities   e Rectangular Mat wizard   e Update STAAD Database   e Set Column or Pedestal Dimension  e Add Self weight    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 204   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Move Selected Entities    The Move Selected Entities menu command allows you to move  selected entities like support positions  beams and piles  After  selecting the entities to be moved click on the Move Selected  Entities button  program will bring a dialog box where you need to  input incremental X Y Z distance     Move selected entities by    x       Unit  in i x   Delta x      Detay   100    Delta Z  0    Rectangular Mat Wizard    This option provides a simple wizard to create mat foundation job   Using this option you can create a job  define boundary  mesh it  and define analysis properties     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphica
224. self weight of Mat foundation  for analysis  Please note  this option is relevant for Mat foundation  design  For all other footing types like Isolated  Combined  the  program automatically calculates and adds self weight as  appropriate     After all relevant input is given  click on    Add Load    button to add  that load       addLoad   Assign To View   Assign Load          tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 33  4 4 3 2 Add a Column Reaction Load    Clicking on the    Add a Column Reaction Load    leaf will open a  form in the data area pane which will allow you to create a nodal  load acting on support        Select the moment unit from the combo box       To create a Reaction Load  first select the Force and Moment Units  to use for the load  Then input the magnitude of the forces  Fx  Fy   Fz  and moments  Mx  My  Mz   Finally  click on Add Load to  include the load  Please note  load direction follows right hand rule   so a positive Fy value will create a tensile force     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 34   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    4 4 3 3    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Add a Point Load  for Mat only     The Point Load button opens a dialog box that allows you to create  a concentrated load on a mat  Point loads are only applicable to  mat foundations                    Forces  Unit kip    Moments  Unit kip      Position  Unit mA  x 0 000000  Y 0 000000  Z 0 0000
225. ser Defined Wind Load       0 Fz  0       Axial Force   Shell End  0 kp J y  Shear   Fx    Channel End 10 Moment   Mx       Calculated Wind Load          0 Mz          C    Ik       kpin       DESIGN WIND PRESSURE  P   0 00256   Kd   Kz   Kat  v2 I G  CF psf   Wind Speed 90 mph    Kd  0 95  kato  ewe  yl case  vl                   Wind Speed    You need to input the wind speed provided in the code in miles per    hour units      Wind Directional Factor  Kd        Click on the button    Table 6 6     This will show a table as below     tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 36   Section 4      STAAD foundation Graphical Environment       Choose any value of them and click    OK    to use it  Else you can  give your own value except those values     Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient  Kz        This is described in section 6 5 6 4  amp  Table 6 5  Choose the  required combination of combo boxes for them     Topographic Factor  Kzt        This is defined in section 6 5 7 2  amp  determined from figure 6 2     Importance Factor  1        Importance is defined in section 6 5 5  amp  determined from figure  6 1  You can choose the value from a table like    Kd    or input your  own value     Y   85 100 mph IV  gt  100 mph    87  1 00  1 15  1 15       tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   5 37    Gust Effect Factor  G        This is the Gust Effect Factor and it is user defined     Net Force Coeffic
226. shing    Select mesh generation technique to be used  Program can generate   either quadrilateral shaped plate element or triangular shaped plate   element  As it is a rectangular mat quadrilateral shape will be more   commonly used  However  if the mat is supported on pile or the mat  has line loads triangular meshing is recommended     Slab Property  Define both analysis and design thickness of the slab  Define soil  subgrade modulus  Please note  the wizard will create the soil  property of the slab but will not assign automatically     Create    Click on create button to generate a rectangular mat foundation job   Update STAAD Database    This utility is only useful if the global geometry of the foundation  project was originally imported from STAAD Pro  If the  STAAD Pro results get changed after the foundation project is  created  this utility allows user to update current project   s input  database with the changed STAAD Pro output  Clicking on this    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 207    menu item will open a file open dialog box where you need to  choose the original file which was imported     Set Column or Pedestal Dimension    This option will only be enabled if any support position is selected   Clicking on the menu item will open a dialog box which will allow  user to set column or pedestal dimension     Set Column Dimension    C  Consider Pedestal  Column Type    Rectangular    Circular    Unit  lin v  Column De
227. sign to View   e Assign to Selection  e Assign to Edit List  e Assign Load          Assign To View    Assign To View vere  Assign To Selection  Assign To Edit List    Assign to View    The Assign to View option assigns the selected load to all relevant  objects in the Graphics Window     Assign to Selection    The Assign to Selection option assigns the selected load to only  those relevant objects that are selected in the Graphics Window     Assign to Edit List    The Assign to Edit List option assigns the selected load to only  those objects that are inputted in the column list edit box     Load Description ax      C Load Description Tree     I Load Case 1  Load1  S E Column Reaction Loading       Reaction  Fy  40 00       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 46   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    Assign Load    The Assign command button assigns the selected load using the  Assignment Method chosen         C Load Description Tree      CI Load Case 1  Load 1      Column Reaction Loading    3 Reaction  Fy  40 00          tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 47  4 4 3 11 Load Combination    Clicking on    Create New load Combination    leaf under    Loads and  Factors    group will bring a form at the bottom of the load  description pane allowing you to create factored algebraic load    combinations     Load Case No  101    Load Combination Title Zase 1   Live Loa
228. so afs             Save as type    STAAD foundation Files    afs  v Cancel       tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 213    STAAD foundation projects are saved with an  afs file extension   After a project has been saved to a file  clicking on the Save icon  again will simply save any updates made to the project to the file  specified when you first saved the project     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 214   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 10 1 2 Print Toolbar    Ss aR g     The Print Toolbar allows you to perform print related operations  for project reports     The Print Toolbar contains the following toolbar icons   e Take Picture  e Report Setup for Printing    e Print Preview  e Print    Take Picture    The Take Picture icon takes a snapshot of the Graphics Window   Pictures taken will then be selectable items when creating reports  via the Report Setup for Print dialog box  Pictures are grouped  together with the job they are created in     Report Setup for Printing    The Report Setup for Print icon opens a dialog box allowing you to  select what items will appear in the active project report     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com       Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 215    Report Setup E 3    Items      Available Selected    isolated z      Picture 2 Picture 1       The drop down list box under the heading Available allows you to  choose 
229. stance in  which all objects in the Graphics Window are visible     Pan    The Pan icon allows you to move the objects in the Graphics  Window up  down  left or right with your mouse cursor     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 252   Section 4      STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  4 10 5 Select Toolbar    feo GR Ba hp KS GH Hel A Oo    The Select Toolbar has several different cursors that allow you to  only select certain objects in a model with your mouse cursor     The Select Toolbar contains the following toolbar icons     e Add Beam   e Select Meshed Nodes Cursor   e Select Plates Cursor   e Select Physical Member Cursor   e Select Pile Cursor   e Select Mat Boundary cursor   e Create a Column Position Clicking On Grid Intersection  Point   e Create a Pile Position Clicking On Grid Intersection Point    Add Beam    The Add Beam Cursor icon allows you to add physical beams  graphically  Select this cursor and then click on two support nodes  to create a beam between those two nodes     Select Meshed Nodes Cursor    The Select Meshed Nodes Cursor icon allows you to select only  mesh nodes with your mouse cursor  causing all other objects to be  ignored     Select Plates Cursor    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 253    The Select Plates Cursor icon allows you to select only plates with  your mouse cursor  causing all other objects to be ignored     Select Physical Membe
230. system  Negative values are downward  compressive  forces and positive values are upward  tensile forces        a Load Description Tree  5 0 Load Case 1  Load Case 1     Column Reaction Loading       Reaction  Fx 5 00 Fy    5 00       The load will now appear under the Column Reaction Loading  folder in the Load Description pane  We will now assign the load to  all the supports we created earlier  First select the load in the Data  Area pane by clicking on it  Then select Assign To View for the  Assignment Method  Finally  click on the Assign button to have the  load assigned to all the supports in the project     Load Description 0000000     E 7 x       a Load Description Tree     C Load Case 1  Load Case i     Column Reaction Loading     Reaction  Fx 5 00 Fy  5 00    Assign To View      Note  Alternatively  we could have selected all the supports in  the Graphics window by clicking on them and then selected             tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual  3 16   Section 3     Quick Tour    Assign To Selection  Or  we could have selected Assign To Edit  List and then typed in the list of nodes for each support        The assigned loadings will be displayed on the nodes as illustrated  in the figure below        If you are not able to see the loads properly  it may because the  scaling value for the display is either too small or too big  To  change the scale value  click on the Scale Setup Options leaf under     Project Info    group in Main Navigator 
231. t   0 5 x x  1  Jl xBxd   fy jfcx Bxdexde     2837 87 mm       Minimum area of steel Astmin   0 0015 x B x D   1260 mm     Check for One Way Shear    100Ast  Percentage of steel p      0 4022    Bxde       Corresponding allowable T     0 42 N mm     Vu max    Bxde    Developed shear stress T         2 4 0 5  Vumax   156 25 x 2 4 x  28583  029    246 KN  2    246x1000    2400 x 294    0 3486N mm2  lt  an  Hence safe     Developed shear stress T      Check for Two Way Shear  Vumax   900 KN    900 x 1000     Developed shear stress T                    0 96 N mm    4x 794 x 294    K    min  0 5 1  1    1    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 10   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    RangaRakes    Allowable shear stress   K  x T   1x0 25  fc    0 968 N mm     Hence safe     Note  We are not deducting the upward force underneath the  area enclosed by the critical perimeter  because in this way we  are in the conservative side     Spacing  2837 87 x4  No  of 12 mm bar                        25 09  26   mx12x12  i 2400  50x 2 12  Spacing            91 52 mm    26 1    Spacing for 12 mm bar   91 52 mm    k e  500                                           tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 5     Indian Verification Problems                                        Comparison  Rereference STAAD foundation   Difference  Value Of    Result Result in Percent  Effecti  oT 294 mm 294 mm None  Depth  G    overming   169 2187 KN m 169 21
232. t  Cover   2 000 in  F  14 000 ksi  Fy   60 000 ksi  Bar Type   Metric  Minimum Bar Diameter     3  Maximum Bar Diameter     11  Concrete Density   125 000  b ft3  Soil Density   115 000 Ib ft3  Allowable Bearing Pressure   4 000 kip ft2    Critical Load case for Shear Force  1  Critical Load case for Bending Force  1  Critical Load case for Sevice Design   1    Load CaseLoad Case 1   1 500       Eccentricity   0 000 in     iAHhkh       s ee al    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 188    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 9    The Menu Commands    This section provides a description of the commands available from  STAAD foundation   s pull down Menu Bar     File Edit View Tools Help    The names of the pull down menus  from left to right across the top  of the screen  are as follows     e File   e Edit   e View  e Tools  e Help    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 189  4 9 1 File Menu    The File Menu allows you to perform project file related operations  such as creating a new project  opening an existing project  saving  a project  etc        J Print    Ctrl P    Print Preview    Print Setup          Import       1C  Temp demo ex082 afs  2C Templex 08 afs  3 untitied afs    Exit    The File Menu contains the following menu commands     e New   e Open   e Save   e Save As  e Print    e Print Preview   e Print Setup   e Import   e Recent Project Files  
233. tagonal        z    act    Job Type Isolated    Default Unit Type          Support Assignment  Listed Supports Octagonal             Select and move the load from    Available Load Case    list to     Selected Load Case    list  Then click on    Create Job    button  This  will create the octagonal footing as you can see in the    Geometry     tab     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 180   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 181    4 8 2 Defining the Design Parameters    Note that after you have created a octagonal footing job  the left  side main navigator tree view is populated with the    Design  Parameter    for    Octagonal Footing Job         4 Octagonal Footing Job    Design Parameters    gt  Design Parameters  L Footing Geometry    gt  Design    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 182   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    4 8 2 1 Design Parameters    Here you have to give all the necessary inputs related to concrete   reinforcement bar and other design parameters details     Design Parameters                    BVA AU BAT BE EA       Strength of concrete        Fe    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 183    Strength of steel        Fy  Depth of Soil  Soil depth above footing     Soil Bearing Capacity 
234. tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 5    5 2    Vertical Vessel Foundation    Three types of foundation are allowed to design for vertical vessel   They are octagonal footing on soil  sguare pile cap and octagonal  pile cap  The following articles describe all the pages of the wizard  for vertical vessel        tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 6  Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  5 2 1 Geometry Page    This is the first page of the wizard where you have to input all the  relevant geometrical data  Following picture shows the  corresponding page     Unit  f a   Overburden and Buoyancy  Depth to Water Table  Dw  9 Soil Depth  Ts  5  Footing Geometry  Diameter  Df   Minimum   20 Maximum   22   Height  T  Minimum   2 5 Maximum  2 5  Pedestal Geometry   Diameter  Dp   8 Thickness  Tp    35   Vessel Geometry   Effective Diameter  Dve   12 Effective Height  Hve    77 22       As you can see that a picture placed right to the page shows the  diagrammatic view of the corresponding dimensions     Unit  Unit of length for all the input in this page only   Overburden and Buoyancy    Depth of Water Table Dw        Depth of the water tables measured from the ground level     Soil Depth Ts     Depth of soil above the foundation measured from the top face of  the footing base     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 7    Footing Geo
235. tem or load case  Click on    No     to cancel the process     StaadFoundation      2 J Are you sure you want to delete selected load item    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 51  4 4 3 13 Safety Factors       Loads  amp  Factors   5 Create New Load Case   6 Add a Column Reaction Load     Add a Point Load  for Mat only    Ef Add a Line Load  for Mat only   E Add a Quadrilateral Load  for Mat only   E Add a Circular Pressure Load  for Mat only   B  Add Member Load     Add Uniform Load   6 Add Concentrated Load   ES Add Trapezoidal Load  Lay Safety Factor Table     5 Create New Load Combination   CS Remove Load Case    The Safety Factors button opens a spreadsheet table in the Data  Area pane that allows you to assign serviceability and design  factors for each load case in a project     Safety Factor                By default  STAAD foundation will assign values for the safety  factors depending on the load type  Refer to Section 4 4 3 1 of this  manual for a detailed explanation of the default values  The default  values can be changed by inputting new values into the table like  any spreadsheet  The tab key or arrow keys may be used to move  from one cell to the next in the table  The serviceability factor will  be applied when checking the base pressure of a foundation   geotechnical design   The design factor will be used for design  shear and reinforcement design      RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 
236. ters are entered  we are ready to  perform the design  Click on the Design leaf under    Pile Cap Job     group in main navigator pane to perform the design          Pile Cap Job    Pile Layout Predefined     gt  Pile Layout Parametric    5 Design Parameters    The program performs the pile cap design  When it is finished  a  results table appears in the Output pane showing the pile cap  dimensions and the bar size and spacing in the longitudinal and  transverse directions                  X Di rection j   Y Direction                  Width   Thickness          Bar  amp  Bar  amp   in in Max  Bar  A  Spacing Max  Bar  A  Spacing  is4000  84000  18 000   10   6   18 00 in  10   6   18 00 in              Heru Design Progress Report Pile Cap Design Summary       The figure above shows results for only one of the six supports in  the project because pile arrangements were selected for only  support 1     Program will automatically open Calculation sheet of the designed  pile cap as shown below     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Check for Two Way Shear          Section 3     Quick Tour    3 81                         Design Shear for Two Way Action S    68 033 kip  Ci  Bela a 1 000  Cw  B  2 CL Cw 2d    92 000  Equation 11 33   V     4 i  guation Vea Bodi 2  Fo   384 027 kip  beta  Equation 11 34   Vo    Beal 20  e  z 434 117 kip  0  Equation 11 35   Voz   4Bod fF    256 018 kip  Vo  minimum of  V4  Vez Veg    256 018 kip    Click on the Layout Drawing tab to view 
237. the job to select items from  Once a job is selected  the list  box under Available will contain the items existing for that  particular job  You can then use the  gt  button to transfer selected  items to a report and the  gt  gt  button to transfer all items to a report   To remove items from a report  use the  lt  button to remove selected  items and the  lt  lt  button to remove all items     Print Preview    The Print Preview icon opens a new window allowing you to view  what the active report will look like when printed out     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 216   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment                      The following command buttons are available in the Print Preview    window   e Print  e Next Page    e Prev  Page  e Two Page  e Zoom In   e Zoom Out  e Close    Print    The Print button opens a standard Windows print dialog box and  allows you to print the active project report     Next Page  The Next Page button displays the next page in a report  If there is    only one page in a report or you are at the last page in a report  the  button will be grayed out     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 217    Prev  Page    The Prev  Page button displays the previous page in a report  If  you are at the first page in a report  the button will be grayed out     Two Page    The Two Page button allows you to display two pages of a report  on the s
238. the subsequent dialog boxes  The following steps    are for assistance on the more significant dialogs  Those that are not  illustrated here are self explanatory     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    1 6   Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up       ig  STAAD  foundation 4   InstallShield Wizard 3  Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for    Hj STAAD foundation 4    The InstallShield R  Wizard will install STAAD  foundation 4 on  your computer  To continue  click Next     WARNING  This program is protected by copyright law and  international treaties        The first screen is a welcome screen  Click on Next button to continue  installation     is  STAAD foundation 4   InstallShield Wizard       License Agreement    Please read the following license agreement carefully           EULA version 200501    it    END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR BENTLEY  SOFTWARE    IMPORTANT   READ CAREFULLY  This End User License   Agreement   EULA   is a legal agreement between you  either   an individual or a single entity  and Bentley Systems    Incorporated   Bentley   for the Bentley software and associated  documentation that accompanies this EULA  which includes the  associated media and Bentley internet based services v      1 accept the terms in the license agreement    OI do not accept the terms in the license agreement          tamilnavarasam com    Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up   1 
239. ting condition  amp  Test condition  You may input all  the three kind of forces for three kinds of conditions  They are  vertical force  base shear and base moment     User Defined Load    You can also input those kinds of load as User Defined Load     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   5 9  5 2 3 Time Period Page    Inputs in this page are basically reguired for wind load and seismic  load calculation according to ASCE 7 05  You can manually enter  the value of the Fundamental time period of the vessel or you can  use the software to calculate it for you     The time period is calculated using Von Miss Theorem as described       below      a   gt  witaj  o DW  100 DED tay    Where     H   Overall height in feet    D   Diameter of each section in feet    w   Distributed weight per foot of each section    W   Weight of each concentrated mass    t   Shell thickness of each section in inches    E   Modulus of elasticity for each section in millions of psi    o B and y   Are coefficient for a given level depending on h  H the  ratio of height of the level above grade to the overall height     AQ and Ay are the difference in the values of a and y from the top  to the bottom of each section of uniform weight  diameter and  thickness  B is determined for each concentrated mass     Now let us describe the input required in the Time Period Page   The following picture shows the corresponding page     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com  
240. ting support co ordinates and  forces moments on the individual supports from STAAD Pro is also  discussed     In STAAD  foundation  you start out by creating a Project to hold  all your physical information  such as column locations  loads  etc   This physical information represents the structure that the  foundation is intended to support  Unless the design of the  structure is modified  these physical conditions generally remain  constant throughout the life of the foundation design project   Your Project also contains Jobs  which are sets of constraints  needed to tell the program how to perform a foundation design   Each project may contain multiple jobs  making it easy for you to  evaluate different design scenarios for a given set of physical  conditions     In general discussion  the names of commands  dialog boxes   toolbar buttons or other program controls are indicated in italics   When it is intended that you perform a specific action  the names of  the menu commands  dialog box labels  data values you are  expected to input  etc   are indicated in bold type     tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 3  3 2 Starting a New Project    To start STAAD  foundation  first click on the Windows Start  button  Next  select the Programs option  select the  STAAD foundation program group  and then click on the  STAAD foundation program icon     f Set Program Access and Defaults       2000 Professional        Location  C  STAADFoundation  A Startup        xenginee
241. tion Graphical Environment   4 11  4411 General Info    S E Project Info      General Information  EF Review History  fp Modeling View Options     3 Scale setup options    The General Information leaf opens a form in the Data Area pane  that allows you to store general information regarding a project   The information you input in the General Information form can  later be used in reports and drawings    Project ID  Project Title  Site Location          Organization   Conta Penan                           Start Date Aug  16 2007  Target Date Aug  16 2007             RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    4 12   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    The General Information form contains the following three groups  of information     e General Information    e Client  e Engineer s Description    General Information    The fields contained in this group box allow you to input an ID   Title  and Site Location for a project     Client    The fields contained in this group box allow you to input  information pertaining to the client of a project such as  Organization  Contact Person  Phone  Fax  E mail  and Address     Engineer   s Description    The fields contained in this group box allow you to input  information pertaining to the engineer of a project such as  Designer  Supervisor  Start Date  and Target Date     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 13  4 4 1 2 Review Hist
242. tive bending moment     The maximum negative bending moment occurs at the location of  zero shear  So we first find the location of zero shear     Location of zero shear from the left side x    1350 608 8     2 2175 m     Therefore  M       608 8 x  2 2175    2     1350 x  2 2175   0 2      1227 KN m     Calculation for punching shear    Assuming 75 mm clear cover and 20   bars   Effective depth  d      950     75    20 2    865 mm    Upward pressure   608 8 2 KN m      304 4 KN m   Allowable shear stress   K  x Es   K    min  1  2 1    Where 8   1  K  1 and 7   0 25  f    1 18 N mm       Therefore allowable shear stress   1 x  118 N mm    1 118 N mm     Maximum shear for C    1350 KN    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    6 24   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Developed shear stress   1350x1000     5   tx 400   865     400   865  x 865    0 533 N mm   lt   Ls anemia  Hence safe     Maximum shear for C    2400 KN    Developed shear stress   _ 2400 x 1000     4x  500   865  x 865    0 508 N mm   lt  f AETA  Hence safe           Note  We are not deducting the upward force underneath the  area enclosed by the critical perimeter  because in this way we  are in the conservative side        Calculation of reinforcement  Maximum negative moment M       1227 KN m  Maximum negative moment width   1227 2 KN m m      613 5 KN m m    Area of steel required on top face along length        fe 4 6MU  Ag   0 5 x    x 1     1        x Bx d   
243. toolbar  Scale setup toolbar    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 211    4 10 1 1 File Toolbar    CD eH   The File Toolbar allows you to perform project file related  operations such as creating a new project  opening an existing    project and saving a project     The File Toolbar contains the following toolbar icons     e New  e Open  e Save    New  The New icon creates a new STAAD  foundation project   Open    The Open icon brings up the open file dialog box and allows you to  open an existing STAAD foundation project     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 212   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    STAAD foundation File opening    Look in      gt  Examples Tote                 Verification   a   Ia ex08_slabDesign0 afs  Ia 2x08iso afs   Ia ex08pile_iso afs                Filename     _ex08 afs          li       Files of type    STAAD foundation Files   afs   v       To open an existing project  navigate to the directory in which the  project file is located and then select the file and click on Open     Save    The Save icon brings up the save file dialog box the first time the  icon is clicked and allows you to save the active project to a file        STAAD  foundation File saving    Save in       Examples Torem              Verification    Ea  ex08 afs    ta  ex08_slabDesign0 afs  Ci ex08iso afs     Eljexospie iso afs                File name   ex08pile_i
244. tor parallel to  the local Y axis  i e   y  Z X X     4  The origin of the axes is at the center  average  of the 4 joint  locations  3 joint locations for a triangle      The sign convention of output force and moment resultants is  illustrated in Section 2 6        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    2 12   Section 2     Theoretical Basis    2 5    Output of Element Forces    ELEMENT FORCE outputs are available at the following locations     A  Center point of the element   B  All corner nodes of the element   C  At any user specified point within the element     The following is a list of the items included in the ELEMENT  STRESS output     SQX  SQY Shear stresses  Force  unit len  thk     SX  SY  SXY Membrane stresses  Force unit len  thk    MX  MY  MXY Bending moments per unit width   Moment unit len     SMAX  SMIN Principal stresses  Force unit area    TMAX Maximum shear stress  Force unit area    ANGLE Orientation of the principal plane   Degrees    VONT  VONB Von Mises stress  where       VM   0 707   SMAX     SMIN     SMAX    SMIN     TRESCAT  TRESCAB Tresca stress  where    TRESCA   MAX  I SMAX SMIN I    SMAX  I    SMIN I            Note    1  All element stress output is in the local coordinate system   The direction and sense of the element stresses are  explained in Section 2 6    2  To obtain element stresses at a specified point within the  element  the user must provide the coordinate system for the  element  
245. uired          m  10m  100    Assuming 3 5 mx 3 5 mx 0 6 m footing dimension  I   12 5 ms   Weight of footing   3 5 x 3 5 x 0 6 x 25 KN   183 75 KN    Therefore  total load on the footing    1000  183 75  KN    1183 75 KN    1183 75    3 5x3 5    96 633 KN m    100 KN m   Hence safe     KN  m        Maximum pressure        1000x1 5 2 2  Ultimate pressure                KN m   122 45 KN m    3 5x3 5    Bending moment at critical section     1 55x1 55  M    122 45 x 3 5 x                514 826 KN m  2    Assuming 35 mm clear cover and 10 mm bar  effective depth  d     600 35 0 5 x 10  mm   560 mm    700                      0 479  1100   0 87 fy    u max    Ru max   0 36 x fc x Ku max X  1 0 42 Ku max    2 066    Mujim   Rumax X B x de      2267 642 x 10   N mm    2267 642 KN m gt  M   Hence safe     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 4   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    Area of Steel Required    Area of steel required along length           fe 4 6Mu   Ast   0 5 x x11    Il xBxd   fy fcx Bx dex de     2646 4 mm     Minimum area of steel Astin   0 0012 x B x D   2520 mm     Check for One Way Shear       Percentage of steel p      0 135  B    Corresponding allowable T    0 28 N mm     Vu max    Bxde       Developed shear stress T     3 5 0 4  Vumax   122 45 x 3 5 x                0 56     424 289 KN  2    424 289 x 1000    3500x560    0 2165 N mm      lt T oan  Hence safe     Developed shear stress 7       Check
246. ult the deformed plates showing the node displacements  appear in the graphics display window     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 3     Quick Tour   3 47       If the slab   s deformed shape is not apparent in your graphics  display  you may need to change the scaling values  Click on the  toolbar for changing scale which will bring up Scale Setup page in  data area pane     x    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    3 48    Section 3     Quick Tour    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual          Scale setup    Result Scales    Displacement      Loading Scales    Point Load      Point Moment      Distributed Load      Pressure Load      Modeling Scales  Footing Width    Pile Length    Under the Result Scales category  decrease the Displacement value  to increase the amount of deflection shown  Why do you decrease  it to increase the deflection  The Displacement value in the dialog  box is the actual displacement of the structure per unit distance on          0 01       Lb          100          100          100          100     ale  Kalo  Kelola           100          100             the graphic diagram  Therefore  if you reduce the amount of actual  structural deflection reguired to display a unit distance of  deflection on the diagram  you will see a larger apparent    displacement on the diagram     After a successful analysis  the program will add several tables in    the output pane below     Heru Design Progress Report A Displacement    Disp Summary A
247. undation Graphical Environment     User defined Wind Load  Shear Value  0 kip  Moment Value  0 kip in y    Calculated Wind Load  DESIGN WIND PRESSURE  P   0 00256   Kd   Kz  Kzt v2 I G  CF  psf   Wind Speed  0 mph  Kaje Table 6 6    Kafor Exp B  x     case 1  x   Kat  0  1  9 Table 6 1  G0  cl  Wind Speed    You need to input the wind speed provided in the code in miles per    hour unit      Wind Directional Factor  Kd        Click on the button    Table 6 6     This will show a table as below        Choose any value of them and click    OK    to use it  Else you can    give your own value except those values     Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient  Kz        tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    5 14   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    This is described in section 6 5 6 4  amp  Table 6 5  Choose the  required combination of combo boxes for them     Topographic Factor  Kzt        This is defined in section 6 5 7 2  amp  determined from figure 6 2     Importance Factor  I        Importance is defined in section 6 5 5  amp  determined from figure  6 1  You can choose the value from a table like    Kd    or input your  own value     Catagory Y   85 100 mph     gt  100 mph       Gust Effect Factor  G        This is the Gust Effect Factor and it is user defined     Net Force Coefficient  Cf        Value of    Cf  according to table T6 10     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment  
248. undation Graphical Environment   4 129    Clicking on any row of the table will highlight that node in the  graphics                       If the node is not highlighted  click on the View Options icon in the    toolbar   i     It will open a form in data area pane which will allow you to setup  view options  Check on Show Nodes option under Meshed Nodes  group to display meshed nodes in the graphics     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User s Manual    4 130   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    Modeling View Options   Support   MI Show Supports  4  Show Support Numbers  Piles   Show Piles Show Pile Numbers  Loading    M  Show Load Arrows   C  Show Load Values    Beams    Show Physical Beams       Draw Line Diagram     Draw 3D diagram    Plates  IBI Show Plates           Draw 2D Plates    Draw 3D Plates    C  Show Plate Numbers  Meshed Nodes     F  Show Nodes    C  Show Node Numbers    Show Boundary and Holes       RangaRakes    tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 131    4 6 5 3 Disp  Displacement  summary    Click on the Disp Summary tab to view node displacement summary  table among all load cases     Design Progress Report Disp Summary Cor    It displays 12 rows where each row shows either maximum or  minimum value for a particular degree of freedom  It also displays  corresponding displacement values for other degrees of freedom on  that row  The table first lists three translational de
249. user must  have a basic familiarity with Microsoft Windows systems in  order to use the software        tamilnavarasam com    Section 1     System Requirements  Installation and Start up   1 5    1 3 Installation    To install STAAD foundation 4 0  ensure you have logged in your machine  with an account that has administrative privileges  If you are unable to log in  with a suitable account  then contact your network administrator to login and  perform the installation     Itis to be noted that  before installing STAAD foundation 4 0  you must install     Bentley IEG License Service  Version 2 0 7    using the MSI package     BentleylEGLicenseService 2 0 7 msi     This MSI package is available at the  Bentley SELECT download site as the pre requisite for STAAD foundation  and can be downloaded from the same location as STAAD foundation  If you  can locate any updated version  later than 2 0 7  of this component  you may  use that package instead of    BentleyIEGLicenseService 2 0 7 msi        Locate STAAD foundation 4 0 installation image on local or network drive and  double click on the installation startup MSI package  STAAD foundation  4 msi  or double click on the installation startup program  Setup exe   available within the Install subfolder of the installation image     While installing STAAD foundation  please follow all of the installation  interaction dialogs and enter necessary information  Following dialogs will  appear in sequence     Follow the instructions on 
250. ut Y  9     ox   Cancel Moment about zZ  9          Add Line load    This option allows user to add a line load on mat slab  This option  is only useful for mat foundation  Click on any grid intersection  point and that point will become the first point of the line  Drag  mouse cursor and click on second grid intersection point a dialog  box will appear allowing you to input load value and modify          coordinates   Add Line Load  x   STAAND  fi oundation Add Line Loading  Force Unit     ie      Length Unit ih       Force  A   Y Position   o    of   an  me  10 z2  60            RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 237    4 10 1 9    View options Toolbar    This option allows you to control graphics display by switching on   off certain options  It also has options to change color of certain  entities     The following commands are available       Modeling View Options      Support  Show Supports Show Support Numbers    Piles   Show Piles Show Pile Numbers  Loading   Show Load Arrows   C Show Load Values  Beams    Show Physical Beams E ti     Draw Line Diagram    Draw 3D diagram    Plates  Show Plates         Draw 2D Plates    Draw 3D Plates     C  Show Plate Numbers   Meshed Nodes  C  Show Nodes   C  Show Node Numbers    Show Boundary and Holes    Show Support    Switch on to view supports in the graphics    tamilnavarasam com    4 238    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     
251. very simple self explanatory form where you need to input  coordinates for top left corner on XZ plane and then specify the  length and width of the rectangle you are about to create     Click on Add Region and that will create a rectangular region in  main view area     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 108   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 109    4 6 3 4 1 3 Add a circular region    Clicking on Add a circular region option will open a form in data  area pane that allows you to create a circular region     Circular Boundary    Define Circular Region    Unit  in    x coordinate at center o    Z coordinate at center fo    Radius   300    Y Level        e            It   s a very simple self explanatory form where you need to input  coordinates for the center of the circle on XZ plane and then  specify radius of the circle     Click on Add Region and that will create a circular region in main    view area     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 110   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment       RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 111  4 6 3 4 1 4 Regular Polygon    Clicking on Regular Polygon option will open a form in data area  pane that allows you to create regular shaped convex polygonal  region              Meshi
252. vironment    5 3 4 Wind Load Generation Page    Inputs for wind load can be given in two ways  You can directly  input the shear force  amp  moment values with choosing the proper    unit or you can use the software to calculate those values using  ASCE 7 2005     To input the load directly choose    User defined Wind Load    radio  button in the wind load page as below and give the value of shear  force with choosing units from the combo box right next to it                           User Defined Wind Load  Axial Force   Shell End  0 kip x  Shear   Fx 0 Fz 0 kip x   Channel End  0 Moment   Mx  0 Mz 0  O Calculated Wind Load  DESIGN WIND PRESSURE  P  0 00256   Kd  Kz K2t v2 I G  Cf  psf   Wind Speed  90 mph  Kd 0 95 Table 6 6  Kz for  Exp B Case 1  Kat    1  115 Table 6 1     0 85  cf  072          Axial Force    Give Axial Force value for both    Shell End    and    Channel End     with proper unit     Shear    Give the value of base shear in    X    and    Z    direction with  choosing the unit from the unit setup combo box     Moment    RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   5 35    Give the value of moment in    X    and    Z    direction with choosing  the unit from the unit setup combo box     Otherwise choose    Calculated Wind Load    radio button which will  activate the required input fields as shown below  All the inputs are    described with mentioning the section and table number of the  code     O U
253. x and Kz  represent lateral spring constants for respecting X and Z direction     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment   4 97  4 6 3 2 Physical beam table    Beams can be added to mat foundation to model additional stiffness  and to transfer loads  Its called Physical beam because user don t  need to worry about beam connectivity with meshed plates   Program internally will break these physical beams in analytical  entities  Physical beams can be created between two support nodes   As you enter two support nodes a physical beam will be created and  the default beam sectional property as set in default properties  option will be assigned  Those values can be edited as required   The input unit for cross sectional property can be changed by    clicking on tool bar icon                   112 00 112 00   12 00  12 00                After adding a beam the beam will be displayed in main view area     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual  4 98   Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 3 3 Pile Layout    Pile layout group has following elements    1  Pile Position Table  2  Rectangular Pile Arrangement Wizard  Parametric   3  Circular Pile Arrangement Wizard  Parametric     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 99  4 6 3 3 1 Pile Position Table    This is a grid where we can add piles by specifying their  x y z   coordinates  You can ad
254. xis as  longitudinal axis     Division along longitudinal axis    Number of slab divisions along longitudinal axis  It must be a  positive number  Program uses 60 as default value     Division along transverse axis    Number of slab divisions along transverse axis  It must be a  positive number  Program uses 60 as default value     Select load type  Shear and reinforcement design for foundation are done only for  ultimate  factored  load combinations  User has the option here to  choose only load cases defined as ultimate or all load cases  assigned to the current job     Generate Moment envelope    Click on this button to create grid and calculate moment envelope  on the grid intersection points     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 148    RangaRakes    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment    4 6 6 2    Design Parameters    Clicking on the Design Parameters opens a form in data area pane  which allows you to input design parameters  design current panel  and review design results                                         Design Parameters z  Grades  Fi 60 Iki 3  Fe 4  ksi  Covers  Top cover 1 vin he  Bottom cover  1 lin ul  Rebar Size  Min  bar size  3 ry  Max  bar size at wi  Rebar Spacing  Max  spacing  12   in v    Min  spacing  2   lin            C  Consider Wood and Armer moments    Result summary Details report    Design parameters are very standard input where you need to input  information on material  cover an
255. y     RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    4 114   Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment    RangaRakes    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual       Meshing Setup z       5 Meshing setup  Boundary          L       Add selected region as       Bounday    Hoe    Control region    Region Identifier     Select Boundary    Generate Mesh    Maximum element size   12 in    v     C  Optimize based on area     Generate Mesh      Edt selected regi         Delete selected r          Boundary    This option is to add region as the main mat boundary  It is the  outermost region of the mat foundation  You can have as many  boundaries as needed  Boundaries can be connected or isolated     Hole    This option is to specify a hole within a mat boundary  You can add  as many holes as needed  Please note  holes must not intersect each  other or the boundary or any control region     tamilnavarasam com    Section 4     STAAD  foundation Graphical Environment   4 115    Control Region  This option is to specify a special region within a mat boundary  which might have a different slab thickness or soil property  You    can add as many control regions as needed  Please note  these  regions must not intersect each other or the boundary or any hole     Region identifier    It is a unique identifier of the region to be added  Any string can be  used     Add Region    Click on this button to add the selected region in the main view to  the current job    Select Boundary   This option will be
256. y the page shows all the load combination saved in the INI  file  You can add new load combination simply by adding factors in  the table  Check on the check box in the second row to use the load  combination  If you save a file with those load combination then the  load combination will be only saved to that file but not in INI file   To save the load combination in the INI file you need to click on     Update Table     You can also manually change the INI file     Delete  To delete a load combination  select a row and then click on     Delete    to delete any particular load combination from the list     But to delete any combination from the INI file you need to click  on    Update Table    after clicking on    Delete        RangaRakes tamilnavarasam com    STAAD  foundation     User   s Manual    6 30   Section 5     Indian Verification Problems    RangaRakes    Undo Redo    Undo stands for cancel out the recent operation and Redo stands  for insert which is just deleted   canceled  Only by clicking anyone can  rectify the work     D a gt  ed    amp  Sh Xx    hi IR    UNDO REDO  The above figure is to give a clear idea about the position of     Undo Redo    in toolbar  The rectangular area indicates    Undo Redo      One can do Undo by pressing  Ctrl   z  and Redo by pressing  Ctrl     y            wl El        Area of Implementation    There are some specific operations on which we have presently  implemented the  feature mentioned below  They are     1 Addition of Footi
257. y transform these local  stresses to global axes system         0 006584 0 000000 1 022040 1 121771  0 813954             0 014716 0 000000 3 014122 0 783163  1 431519                t   0 014872 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 2 750760 0 503668  1 043669                10 008342 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000  1 204627  0 397224  0 580257              0 001704 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000  6 574391  0 261886  0 572458         0 000615  0 000000 0 000000 0 000000  10 978528  0 016307  0 578476                              0 002165  0 000000  0 000000 0 000000  14 251686   0 229303   0 218469       tamilnavarasam com    RangaRakes    4 6 5 8    Plate Stresses Summary    STAAD foundation     User   s Manual    4 136  Section 4     STAAD foundation Graphical Environment       Like all other summary table plate stress summary table displays  minimum and maximum stress of all stress types among all load  cases along with plate and load number                          1   0 015921 0 000000  49 995811  26 713346 4157263  108 1  0 302032   0 014793  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000 50613258  27 294970   2 959754  1096 i 0 007524  0 254060  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  52 232689  10 750283   0 807425  150 1 0 016595   0 305387  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  ss269028  19 792627  0 649519  1 E 0 003575  0 006584  0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  1 022040  1 121771   0 813954  1 1 0 003575  0 006564 0 000000  0 000000  0 000000  1 022040  1 121771   0 813954  1 1 0 002575  0 006564  0 000000  0 000000 10
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
 STAAD.foundation  staad foundation  staad foundation advanced  staad foundation advanced 2024  staad foundation v8i  staad foundation advanced 2023  staad.foundation v8i ss4 5.3  staad.foundation 5.3 
    
Related Contents
User Manual - AJ Medical    取扱説明書 - Microsoft    Bitdefender GravityZone  BERS Pro v4.1 User`s Manual  Warehouse of Tiffany RL8054 Instructions / Assembly    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file